Futaba 10J Transmitter Manual

10-Channel Digital Proportional R/C System
TM
TM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1M23N29216
Technical updates and additional programming examples available at: https://www.futabausa.com/
Entire Contents © 2018
7$%/( 2) &217(176
Introduction ............................................6
Ɣ6upport and 6HrYicH ..................................6
Ɣ$ppOication ([port and 0odi¿cation ....7
Ɣ'H¿nitions of 6\mboOs ...............................9
INTRODUCTION
Ɣ6afHt\ 3rHcautions do not opHratH without
rHadinJ .......................................................9
%HforH usH ..............................................12
BEFORE USE
Ɣ)HaturHs of 1- ........................................12
Ɣ&ontHnts and tHchnicaO spHci¿cations ....13
Ɣ6\stHm compatibiOit\ ...............................13
Ɣ$ccHssoriHs................................................14
COMMON
Ɣ7ransmittHr controOs ................................15
%attHr\ ............................................................. 17
6witch ............................................................. 18
7o turn on thH 1- ......................................... 18
5HcHiYHr and sHrYo connHctions .................... 19
&harJinJ thH battHriHs ................................... 22
6ticN adMustmHnt ............................................. 23
$dMustinJ dispOa\ contrast............................. 24
&onnHctor/3OuJ ............................................... 24
7ransmittHr dispOa\s buttons .................... 25
:arninJ Hrror dispOa\s.............................. 26
/inN procHdurH ............................................... 27
AIRPLANE
HELICOPTER
Ɣ5HcHiYHr nomHncOaturH ............................28
Ɣ5386% &+ modH ..................................29
Ɣ5HcHiYHr s antHnna instaOOation ...............3
GLIDER
Ɣ0ountinJ thH sHrYo ..................................31
Ɣ5anJH chHcN thH radio .............................32
Ɣ6.%86/6.%862 InstaOOation .....................33
Ɣ6.%86 :irinJ H[ampOH ............................34
MULTICOPTER
Ɣ6.%862 6\stHm .........................................35
Ɣ6.%86/6.%862 'HYicH sHttinJ .................36
Ɣ7HOHmHtr\ 6\stHm .....................................37
TX SETTING
3
&ommon function.................................38
6ticN position aOarm ....................................... 65
Ɣ0odHO sHOHct ..............................................4
Ɣ7HOHmHtr\ ..................................................66
0odHO sHOHct .................................................... 41
0odHO cop\ ...................................................... 41
'atH rHsHt......................................................... 41
5; t\pH............................................................ 42
/inN ................................................................. 42
7HOHmHtr\:5[batt .......................................... 66
7HOHmHtr\:([tYoOt ......................................... 7
7HOHmHtr\:tHmp............................................... 75
7HOHmHtr\:rpm ................................................ 76
7HOHmHtr\:aOtitudH .......................................... 77
7HOHmHtr\:Yario .............................................. 78
7HOHmHtr\:distancH ......................................... 79
7HOHmHtr\:spHHd.............................................. 81
7HOHmHtr\:battHr\ ........................................... 82
Ɣ0odHO namH ..............................................43
0odHO namH .................................................... 43
8sHr namH ....................................................... 44
Ɣ)aiO safH .....................................................45
Ɣ6HrYo rHYHrsH ............................................47
Ɣ7imHr.........................................................48
Ɣ6HrYo monitor...........................................49
Ɣ(nd point ..................................................5
Ɣ7rim...........................................................51
Ɣ6Hnsor sOot.................................................83
6Hnsor:rHJistHr ................................................ 84
6Hnsor:sHns sOot ............................................... 85
6Hnsor:initiaOi]H .............................................. 86
6Hnsor:aOO cOHar ............................................... 87
6Hnsor:manuaOO\ assiJninJ a sHnsor ............. 88
Ɣ6ub trim ....................................................52
Ɣ6.%86 sHrYo OinN ......................................89
Ɣ3roJram mi[inJ .......................................53
Ɣ0odHO transfHr..........................................92
Ɣ$8; channHO ............................................56
Ɣ7rainHr ......................................................93
Ɣ3aramHtHr .................................................58
'atH rHsHt......................................................... 6
0odHO t\pH ...................................................... 61
6wash t\pH for hHOi ....................................... 61
:inJ t\pH for JOidHr .................................... 61
$7/ 7rim ........................................................ 61
/&' contrast .................................................. 62
%acN OiJht ........................................................ 62
/iJht timH ........................................................ 62
/iJht adMustmHnt ............................................ 62
+omH dispOa\ .................................................. 62
%attHr\ aOarm YoOtaJH ................................... 62
%attHr\ aOarm YoOtaJH Yibration ................... 63
%u]]Hr tonH ..................................................... 63
-oJ NH\ naYiJation .......................................... 63
-oJ OiJht ........................................................... 63
-oJ OiJht timH .................................................. 64
7HOHmHtr\ modH .............................................. 64
7HOHmHtr\ unit................................................. 64
6pHHch OanJuaJH ............................................. 64
6pHHch YoOumH ................................................ 64
4
$irpOanH function .................................95
Ɣ$iOHron 'iffHrHntiaO..................................97
Ɣ$iOHronĺ5uddHr .....................................98
Ɣ97aiO .........................................................99
Ɣ*\ro sHnsor ............................................1
Ɣ(OHYon .....................................................11
Ɣ$iOYator ...................................................12
Ɣ7hrottOHĺ1HHdOH 0i[inJ ......................13
Ɣ'uaO ratH ／ (;32 ................................14
Ɣ)OapHron..................................................16
Ɣ$ir braNH ................................................18
Ɣ)Oapĺ(OHYator mi[inJ .......................... 11
Ɣ(OHYatorĺ)Oap mi[inJ .......................... 111
Ɣ)Oap trim ................................................. 112
Ɣ7hrottOH cut............................................. 113
ƔIdOH down ................................................ 115
Ɣ6nap roOO.................................................. 116
Ɣ7hrottOH curYH ........................................ 117
Ɣ&ambHr mi[inJ ......................................16
Ɣ3I7curYH ................................................ 118
Ɣ%uttHrÀ\ mi[inJ .....................................161
Ɣ7hrottOH dHOa\ ......................................... 119
Ɣ&ambHrĺ(OHYator mi[inJ ....................162
Ɣ(OHYatorĺ&ambHr mi[inJ ....................163
+HOicoptHr function ............................12
Ɣ$iOHronĺ&ambHr mi[inJ......................165
Ɣ&ondition ................................................122
Ɣ$iOHronĺ%raNH Àap ..............................166
Ɣ6wash $)5 .............................................123
Ɣ7rim mi[ .................................................167
Ɣ6wash mi[inJ .........................................124
Ɣ6wash rinJ ..............................................126
0uOticoptHr function ..........................168
Ɣ7rim offsHt ..............................................127
Ɣ*\ro sHnsor ............................................17
Ɣ'HOa\ .......................................................128
Ɣ'uaO ratH ／ (;32 ................................171
Ɣ7hrottOH cut.............................................129
Ɣ&HntHr aOarm ..........................................173
Ɣ*\ro sHnsor ............................................131
Ɣ'uaO ratH ／ (;32 ................................132
7; sHttinJ............................................174
Ɣ7hrottOH curYH ........................................134
Ɣ6ticNmodH ..............................................174
Ɣ3itch curYH ..............................................136
Ɣ6ticNadMustmHnt ....................................174
Ɣ5HYoOution mi[inJ 3I7 to 58' .........138
Ɣ7hrottOH sticN rHYHrsH.............................175
Ɣ7hrottOH hoOd ..........................................14
Ɣ/anJuaJH ................................................175
Ɣ*oYHrnor mi[inJ ....................................141
Ɣ+oYHrinJ throttOH ...................................143
Ɣ+oYHrinJ pitch .......................................144
Ɣ+I//2pitch trim ...................................145
Ɣ6washĺ7hrottOH mi[inJ .......................146
Ɣ7hrottOHĺ1HHdOH mi[inJ.......................147
*OidHr function ...................................148
Ɣ$iOHron 'iffHrHntiaO................................15
Ɣ$iOHronĺ5uddHr ...................................151
Ɣ9taiO........................................................152
Ɣ*\ro sHnsor ............................................153
Ɣ'uaO ratH ／ (;32 ................................154
Ɣ0otor switch ..........................................156
Ɣ&ondition ................................................157
Ɣ5uddHrĺ$iOHron mi[inJ ......................158
Ɣ&ambHr Àap mi[inJ ...............................159
5
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba® T-FHSS Air-2.4GHz 10J series digital proportional R/C
system. This system is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order
IRU\RXWRPDNHWKHEHVWXVHRI\RXUV\VWHPDQGWRÀ\VDIHO\SOHDVHUHDGWKLVPDQXDOFDUHIXOO\
,I \RX KDYH DQ\ GLIILFXOWLHV ZKLOH XVLQJ \RXU V\VWHP SOHDVH FRQVXOW WKH PDQXDO RXU RQOLQH
)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG 4XHVWLRQV RQ WKH ZHE SDJHV UHIHUHQFHG EHORZ \RXU KREE\ GHDOHU RU WKH
Futaba Service Center.
Introduction
'XHWRXQIRUHVHHQFKDQJHVLQSURGXFWLRQSURFHGXUHVWKHLQIRUPDWLRQFRQWDLQHGLQWKLVPDQXDOLV
subject to change without notice.
Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during
your hobby’s “off season” to ensure safe operation.
IN NORTH AMERICA
3OHDVH IHHO IUHH WR FRQWDFW WKH )XWDED 6HUYLFH &HQWHU IRU DVVLVWDQFH LQ RSHUDWLRQ XVH DQG
programming. Please be sure to regularly visit the 10J Frequently Asked Questions web site
DW ZZZIXWDEDXVDFRP 7KLV SDJH LQFOXGHV H[WHQVLYH SURJUDPPLQJ XVH VHW XS DQG VDIHW\
information on the 10J radio system and is updated regularly. Any technical updates and US
PDQXDO FRUUHFWLRQV ZLOO EH DYDLODEOH RQ WKLV ZHE SDJH ,I \RX GR QRW ¿QG WKH DQVZHUV WR \RXU
TXHVWLRQVWKHUHSOHDVHVHHWKHHQGRIRXU)$4DUHDIRULQIRUPDWLRQRQFRQWDFWLQJXVYLDHPDLO
for the most rapid and convenient response.
'RQ¶W KDYH ,QWHUQHW DFFHVV" ,QWHUQHW DFFHVV LV DYDLODEOH DW QR FKDUJH DW PRVW SXEOLF OLEUDULHV
VFKRROVDQGRWKHUSXEOLFUHVRXUFHV:H¿QGLQWHUQHWVXSSRUWWREHDIDEXORXVUHIHUHQFHIRUPDQ\
PRGHOHUVDVLWHPVFDQEHSULQWHGDQGVDYHGIRUIXWXUHUHIHUHQFHDQGFDQEHDFFHVVHGDWDQ\KRXU
RIWKHGD\QLJKWZHHNHQGRUKROLGD\,I\RXGRQRWZLVKWRDFFHVVWKHLQWHUQHWIRULQIRUPDWLRQ
KRZHYHUGRQ¶WZRUU\2XUVXSSRUWWHDPVDUHDYDLODEOH0RQGD\WKURXJK)ULGD\&HQWUDOWLPH
to assist you.
FOR SERVICE:
Futaba Service Center
FUTABA Corporation of America
:DOO7ULDQD+Z\
+XQWVYLOOH$/86$
3KRQH
)$;
www.futabausa.com
OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA
3OHDVHFRQWDFW\RXU)XWDEDLPSRUWHULQ\RXUUHJLRQRIWKHZRUOGWRDVVLVW\RXZLWKDQ\TXHVWLRQV
problems or service needs.
3OHDVH UHFRJQL]H WKDW DOO LQIRUPDWLRQ LQ WKLV PDQXDO DQG DOO VXSSRUW DYDLODELOLW\ LV EDVHG XSRQ
the systems sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact
your region’s support center for assistance.
6
Introduction
AppOication E[port and Modi¿cation
7KLVSURGXFWPD\EHXVHGIRUPRGHODLUSODQHRUVXUIDFH ERDWFDUURERW XVH,WLVQRWLQWHQGHG
for use in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes.
7KH SURGXFW LV VXEMHFW WR UHJXODWLRQV RI WKH 0LQLVWU\ RI 5DGLR7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQV DQG LV
restricted under Japanese law to such purposes.
2. Exportation precautions:
D :KHQWKLVSURGXFWLVH[SRUWHGIURPWKHFRXQWU\RIPDQXIDFWXUHLWVXVHLVWREHDSSURYHGE\
the laws governing the country of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If
WKLVSURGXFWLVWKHQUHH[SRUWHGWRRWKHUFRXQWULHVLWPD\EHVXEMHFWWRUHVWULFWLRQVRQVXFKH[SRUW
Prior approval of the appropriate government authorities may be required. If you have purchased
WKLVSURGXFWIURPDQH[SRUWHURXWVLGH\RXUFRXQWU\DQGQRWWKHDXWKRUL]HG)XWDEDGLVWULEXWRULQ
\RXUFRXQWU\SOHDVHFRQWDFWWKHVHOOHULPPHGLDWHO\WRGHWHUPLQHLIVXFKH[SRUWUHJXODWLRQVKDYH
been met.
(b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control
5HJXODWLRQVDQGDQDSSOLFDWLRQIRUH[SRUWDSSURYDOPXVWEHVXEPLWWHG7KLVHTXLSPHQWPXVWQRW
be utilized to operate equipment other than radio controlled models.
0RGL¿FDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGUHSODFHPHQWRISDUWV)XWDEDLVQRWUHVSRQVLEOHIRUXQDXWKRUL]HG
PRGL¿FDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGUHSODFHPHQWRISDUWVRQWKLVSURGXFW$Q\VXFKFKDQJHVPD\YRLG
the warranty.
Compliance Information Statement
7KLVGHYLFHFRPSOLHVZLWKSDUWRIWKH)&&5XOHV2SHUDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWRWKHIROORZLQJWZR
conditions:
7KLV GHYLFH PD\ QRW FDXVH KDUPIXO LQWHUIHUHQFH DQG 7KLV GHYLFH PXVW DFFHSW DQ\
LQWHUIHUHQFHUHFHLYHGLQFOXGLQJLQWHUIHUHQFHWKDWPD\FDXVHXQGHVLUHGRSHUDWLRQ
RF Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:
FUTABA Corporation of America
:DOO7ULDQD+Z\+XQWVYLOOH$/86$
3KRQHRU(PDLOVHUYLFH#IXWDED86$FRP
7KH 5%5& 6($/ RQ WKH QLFNHOFDGPLXP EDWWHU\ FRQWDLQHG LQ )XWDED SURGXFWV
indicates that Futaba Corporation is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide
SURJUDP WR FROOHFW DQG UHF\FOH WKHVH EDWWHULHV DW WKH HQG RI WKHLU XVHIXO OLYHV ZKHQ
taken out of service within the United States. The RBRC. program provides a
convenient alternative to placing used nickel-cadmium batteries into the trash or
PXQLFLSDOZDVWHV\VWHPZKLFKLVLOOHJDOLQVRPHDUHDV
(for USA)
You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery.
3OHDVH FDOO %$77(5< IRU LQIRUPDWLRQ RQ 1L&G EDWWHU\ UHF\FOLQJ LQ \RXU DUHD )XWDED
Corporation involvement in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment
and conserving natural resources.
*RBRC is a trademark of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation.
7
Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement (for U.S.A.)
Introduction
7KLVHTXLSPHQWKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGIRXQGWRFRPSO\ZLWKWKHOLPLWVIRUD&ODVV%GLJLWDOGHYLFHSXUVXDQW
WR 3DUW RI WKH )&& 5XOHV7KHVH OLPLWV DUH GHVLJQHG WR SURYLGH UHDVRQDEOH SURWHFWLRQ DJDLQVW KDUPIXO
interference in a residential installation.
7KLV HTXLSPHQW JHQHUDWHV XVHV DQG FDQ UDGLDWH UDGLR IUHTXHQF\ HQHUJ\ DQG LI QRW LQVWDOOHG DQG XVHG LQ
DFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVPD\FDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRFRPPXQLFDWLRQV+RZHYHUWKHUH
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
KDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRRUWHOHYLVLRQUHFHSWLRQZKLFKFDQEHGHWHUPLQHGE\WXUQLQJWKHHTXLSPHQWRII
DQGRQWKHXVHULVHQFRXUDJHGWRWU\WRFRUUHFWWKHLQWHUIHUHQFHE\RQHRUPRUHRIWKHIROORZLQJPHDVXUHV
--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
--Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
--Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
--Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION:
To assure continued FCC compliance:
$Q\FKDQJHVRUPRGL¿FDWLRQVQRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKHJUDQWHHRIWKLVGHYLFHFRXOGYRLGWKHXVHU V
authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING:
This product contains a chemical known to cause cancer and birth defects (or other reproductive
harm).
Compliance Information Statement (for EU)
Declaration of Conformity
+HUHE\)XWDED&RUSRUDWLRQGHFODUHVWKDWWKHUDGLRHTXLSPHQWW\SH7-LVLQFRPSOLDQFHZLWK'LUHFWLYH
(8
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
http://www.rc.futaba.co.jp/english/index.html
Where to Fly
:H UHFRPPHQG WKDW \RX À\ DW D UHFRJQL]HG PRGHO DLUSODQH À\LQJ ¿HOG<RX FDQ ¿QG PRGHO
FOXEVDQG¿HOGVE\DVNLQJ\RXUQHDUHVWKREE\GHDOHURULQWKH86E\FRQWDFWLQJWKH$FDGHP\
RI0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV
7KH QDWLRQDO$FDGHP\ RI 0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV $0$ KDV PRUH WKDQ FKDUWHUHG FOXEV
DFURVV WKH FRXQWU\ 7KURXJK DQ\ RQH RI WKHP LQVWUXFWRU WUDLQLQJ SURJUDPV DQG LQVXUHG
QHZFRPHU WUDLQLQJ DUH DYDLODEOH &RQWDFW WKH$0$ DW WKH DGGUHVV RU WROOIUHH SKRQH QXPEHU
below.
Academy of Model Aeronautics
(DVW0HPRULDO'ULYH
0XQFLH,1
7HOH )D[ or via the Internet at http:\\www.
modelaircraft.org
Always pay particular attention to the Àying ¿eld¶s rules as well as the presence and
ORFDWLRQ RI VSHFWDWRUV WKH ZLQG GLUHFWLRQ DQG DQ\ REVWDFOHV RQ WKH ¿HOG %H YHU\ FDUHIXO
À\LQJLQDUHDVQHDUSRZHUOLQHVWDOOEXLOGLQJVRUFRPPXQLFDWLRQIDFLOLWLHVDVWKHUHPD\EH
radio interference in their vicinity.
8
Precautions
Application, Export, and Modification Precautions.
■ No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior permission.
■ The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
■ The contents of this manual should be complete, but if there are any unclear or missing parts please contact a Futaba Service
Center.
■ Futaba is not responsible for the use of this product by the customer.
Introduction
1. This product is only designed for use with radio control models. Use of the product described in this instruction
manual is limited to radio control models.
2. Export precautions:
a) When this product is exported, it cannot be used where prohibited by the laws governing radio waves of the
destination country.
b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations.
3. Modification, adjustment, and parts replacement
Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modification, adjustment, or replacement of parts on this product.
■ Company and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.
For safe use
Please observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this product at all times.
Meaning of Special Markings:
The parts of this manual indicated by the following marks require special attention from the standpoint of safety.
DANGER - Procedures which may lead to dangerous conditions and cause death/serious injury if not carried out properly.
WARNING - Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury to the user if not carried
out properly or procedures where the probability of super¿cial injury or physical damage is high.
CAUTION - Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to the user is small, but there is a danger of injury, or physical
damage, if not carried out properly.
0DQGDWRU\
= Prohibited
WARNING: Always keep electrical components away from small children.
Flying Precautions
WARNING
Never grasp the built-in transmitter antenna
while flying.
Never fly on a rainy day, when the wind is
strong or at night.
■ The transmitter output may drop drastically.
■ Water could lead to failure or improper functionality and poor
control of the aircraft which could lead to a crash.
Always make sure that all transmitter stick
movements operate all functions properly in the
model prior to flight. Also, make sure that all
switches, etc. function properly as well. If there
are any difficulties, do not use the system until all
inputs are functioning properly.
Never fly in power down (range check) mode.
■ In the dedicated range test power down mode, the transmitter
output range is reduced and may cause a crash.
While operating, never touch the transmitter
with, or bring the transmitter near, another transmitter, a cellphone, or other wireless devices.
Never turn the power switch off during flight
or while the engine or motor is running.
■ Operation will become impossible and the aircraft will crash.
Even if the power switch is turned on, operation will not begin
until transmitter and receiver internal processing is complete.
Do not start the engine or motor while wearing
the neck strap.
■ The neck strap may become entangled with the rotating
propeller, rotor, etc. and cause serious injury.
Do not fly when you are physically impaired as
it could pose a safety hazard to yourself or others.
■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.
9
■ Near homes, schools, hospitals or other places where people
congregate.
Always check operation of each control surface
and perform a range test before each flying
session. Also, when using the trainer function,
check the operation of both the teacher and
student transmitter.
■ Near high voltage lines, high structures, or communication
facilities.
■ Even one incorrect transmitter setting or aircraft abnormality
can cause a crash.
Do not fly at the following places:
■ Near another radio control flying field.
■ Near or above people.
When setting the transmitter on the ground
during flight preparations, do not stand it upright.
Introduction
■ The transmitter may tip over, the sticks may move and the
propeller or rotor may rotate unexpectedly and cause injury.
Do not touch the engine, motor, or FET amp
during and immediately after use.
■ These items may become hot during use.
Before turning on the transmitter:
1. Always move the transmitter throttle stick position to the
minimum (idle) position.
2. Turn on the transmitter first and then the receiver.
When turning off the transmitter's power
switch. After the engine or motor has stopped
(state in which it will not rotate again):
For safety, fly so that the aircraft is visible at all
times.
1. Turn off the receiver power switch.
■ Flying behind buildings or other large structures will not only
cause you to lose sight of the aircraft, but also degrade the RF
link performance and cause loss of control.
■ If the power switch is turned on/off in the opposite order, the
propeller may rotate unexpectedly and cause a serious injury.
From the standpoint of safety, always set the
fail safe function.
■ In particular, normally set the throttle channel to idle.
Always check the remaining capacity of the
transmitter and receiver batteries before each
flying session prior to flight.
■ Low battery capacity will cause loss of control and a crash.
2. Then turn off the transmitter power switch.
■ Also always observe the above order when setting the fail safe
function.
■ Maximum low throttle: Direction in which the engine or motor
runs at the slowest speed or stops.
When adjusting the transmitter, stop the engine except when necessary. In the case of a motor, disconnect the wiring and don't allow it to
continue operation. When doing so, please exercise extreme caution. Ensure that the aircraft is
secured and that it will not come into contact with
anything or anyone. Ensure that the motor will
not rotate prior to making any adjustments.
■ Unexpected high speed rotation of the engine may cause a
serious injury.
Battery and Charger Handling Precautions
DANGER
Do not recharge a battery that is damaged, deteriorated, leaking electrolyte, or wet.
Do not charge the battery if it is covered with
any object as it may become very hot.
Do not use the charger in applications other
than as intended.
Do not use the battery in a combustible environment.
Do not allow the charger or battery to become
wet.
■ The combustibles may ignite and cause an explosion or fire.
■ Do not use the charger, when it or your hands, are wet. Do not
use the charger in humid places.
Do not short circuit the battery.
Do not solder, repair, deform, modify, or disassemble the battery and/or battery charger.
Do not drop the battery into a fire or bring it
near a fire.
Do not charge and store the battery in direct
sunlight or other hot places.
Always charge the battery before each flying
session.
■ If the battery goes dead during flight, the aircraft will crash.
Always use the charger with the specified power supply voltage.
■ Use the special charger by connecting it to a proper power
outlet.
If the battery liquid should get in your eyes, do
not rub your eyes, but immediately wash them
with tap water or other clean water and get treated by a doctor.
■ The liquid can cause blindness.
10
WARNING
Do not touch the charger and battery for any
length of time during charging.
■ Doing so may result in burns.
Do not use a charger or battery that has been
damaged.
■ Continued use may cause fire, combustion, generation of heat,
or rupture.
Do not subject the batteries to impact.
■ Doing so may cause fire, combustion, generation of heat,
rupture, or liquid leakage.
■ Not doing so may cause combustion.
If the battery liquid gets on your skin or
clothing, immediately flush the area with tap
water or other clean water.
■ Consult a doctor. The liquid can cause skin damage.
After the specified charging time has elapsed,
end charging and disconnect the charger from the
receptacle.
When recycling or disposing of the battery,
isolate the terminals by covering them with
insulation tape.
■ Short circuit of the terminals may cause combustion,
generation of heat or rupture.
Introduction
If any abnormalities such as smoke or
discoloration are noted with either the charger or
the battery, remove the battery from the charger
and disconnect the power cord plug and do not
use the charger.
If the battery leaks liquid or generates an
abnormal odor, immediately move it to a safe
place for disposal.
CAUTION
Do not place heavy objects on top of the
battery or charger. Also, do not place the battery
or charger in any location where it may fall.
■ Doing so may cause damage or injury.
Do not store or use the battery and charger
where it is dusty or humid.
■ Insert the power cord plug into the receptacle only after
eliminating the dust.
Do not charge the battery in extreme temperatures.
■ Doing so will degrade the battery performance. An ambient
temperature of 10 ℃ to 30 ℃ (50 ℉ to 86 ℉ ) is ideal for
charging.
Unplug the charger when not in use.
Do not bend or pull the cord unreasonably and
do not place heavy objects on the cord.
■ The power cord may be damaged and cause combustion,
generation of heat, or electric shock.
Storage and Disposal Precautions
CAUTION
Do not store wireless devices in the following
places:
・Where it is extremely hot (40℃ [104F] or higher) or
cold (-10℃ [14F] or lower)
・Where the equipment will be exposed to direct sunlight
・Where the humidity is high
・Where vibration is prevalent
・Where it is very dusty
・Where the device may be exposed to steam and heat
When the device will not be used for a long
time, remove the battery from the transmitter
and aircraft and store them in a dry place where
the temperature is between 0 and 30℃ [32F and
86F].
■ When left 'as is', batteries may deteriorate, leak, or be otherwise
damaged.
Other Precautions
CAUTION
Do not directly expose plastic parts to fuel, oil,
exhaust gas, etc.
■ If left in such an environment, the plastic may be damaged.
■ Since the metal parts of the case may corrode, always keep
them clean.
Join the Academy of Model Aeronautics.
Always use genuine Futaba products such as
transmitter, receiver, servo, FET amplifier, battery, etc.
■ Futaba is not responsible for damage sustained by combination
with parts other than Futaba Genuine Parts. Use the parts
specified in the instruction manual and catalog.
■ The Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA) provides guidelines
and liability protection should the need arise.
11
BEFORE USE
FEATURES
ƔT-FHSS Air-2.4G multi-function 1-channel transmitter
The Futaba 2.4GHz T-FHSS Air system is employed.
ƔTelemetry system
A T-FHSS Air bidirectional communication system is used. The voltage of the battery mounted in the
IXVHODJHFDQEHGLVSOD\HGDWWKHWUDQVPLWWHUGXULQJÀLJKW$OWLWXGHVSHHGWHPSHUDWXUHDQGRWKHUIXVHODJH
data can be displayed at the transmitter by installing various optional telemetry sensors in the fuselage.
ƔSpeech function
Telemetry data can be listened to by plugging commercial earphones into the transmitter.
ƔBuilt-in diversity antenna
Before use
Diversity antenna built into the transmitter provides a simple appearance and improves handling ease.
ƔS.BUS/S.BUS2 servo setting function
S.BUS/S.BUS2 servo channel and various functions can be set by connecting the servo to the
transmitter.
ƔPower-saving type transmitter
)RXU$$ DONDOLQH EDWWHULHV FDQ EH XVHG 7KH RSWLRQDO +7)% 1L0+ 9 P$ RU
)7)%9 OLWKLXPIHUULWH9P$ EDWWHU\FDQDOVREHXVHG
ƔVibration
$IXQFWLRQWKDWQRWL¿HVWKHRSHUDWRURIYDULRXVDODUPVE\YLEUDWLQJWKHWUDQVPLWWHUFDQEHVHOHFWHG
ƔUniTue model memory system
The transmitter body contains a 30 model memory.
ƔMixing type selection
)L[HGZLQJKHOLFRSWHUDQGJOLGHUPL[LQJW\SHFDQEHVHOHFWHGWRPDWFKWKHIXVHODJH,QDGGLWLRQ
swash plate types can also be selected for helicopters. Multi-copter selection is also possible.
ƔDigital trim
5DSLGWULPPLQJGXULQJÀLJKWLVSRVVLEOH7KHVRXQGFKDQJHVDWWKHFHQWHURIWULP7KHVWHSVL]HFDQEH
arbitrarily changed. The trim position is displayed on the LCD.
Ɣ/ever head length adjustment and new lever head shape
The lever head length can be adjusted. A new lever head shape that reduces slip during operation has
been adopted.
ƔSwitch/VR position change and AU; channel function change
Mixing and other switches and knobs can be selected. Since the function of the AUX channels (5ch 〜
FK FDQDOVREHFKDQJHGRULJLQDOPL[LQJLQDGGLWLRQWRH[LVWLQJPL[LQJFDQEHFUHDWHGE\XVLQJWKH
programmable mixing function.
ƔModel data transfer function
Model data can be wirelessly transferred between 10J or 8J transmitters.
R38SB receiver
ƔT-FHSS Air system S.BUS compatible
S.BUS output and conventional channel output are provided. S.BUS and conventional system sharing is
possible.
12
ƔE;T battery terminal
7KHYROWDJHFDQEHGLVSOD\HGDWWKHWUDQVPLWWHUE\EUDQFKFRQQHFWLQJWKHGULYHEDWWHU\HWFLQVWDOOHGLQ
WKHIXVHODJHZLWKWKH&$59,1FDEOHVROGVHSDUDWHO\
ƔBattery fail safe function
,IWKHUHFHLYHUEDWWHU\YROWDJHGURSVEHORZWKHVHWYDOXHZKHQWKHIDLOVDIHPRGHZDVVHOHFWHGWKH
battery fail safe function moves the servo to a preset position.
CONTENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6SHFL¿FDWLRQVDQGUDWLQJVDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH
<our 1- includes the following components:
• T10J transmitter for airplanes or helicopters
• R3008SB Receiver
• Switch harness
• Neck strap
*The set contents depend on the type of set.
VWLFNFKDQQHO7)+66$LU*V\VWHP Transmitting frequency: 2.4GHz band
6\VWHP7)+66$LU6)+66VZLWFKDEOH
Power supply: 6.0V Dry battery
Frequency band
2.4GHz
5)SRZHURXWSXWPZ(,53
Before use
Transmitter T1-
Receiver R38SB
7)+66$LU*V\VWHPGXDODQWHQQDGLYHUVLW\6%86V\VWHP
Frequency band
2.4GHz
3RZHUUHTXLUHPHQW9a9EDWWHU\RUUHJXODWHGRXWSXWIURP(6&HWF 5)SRZHURXWSXWPZ(,53
6L]H[[LQ [[PP
:HLJKWR] J
%DWWHU\)69ROWDJH,WVHWVXSZLWKDWUDQVPLWWHU
:KHQXVLQJ(6& VPDNHVXUHWKDWWKHUHJXODWHGRXWSXWFDSDFLW\PHHWV\RXUXVDJHDSSOLFDWLRQ
SYSTEM COMPATIBILITY
The 10J is a 2.4GHz T-FHSS Air system. The transmitter can also be switched to S-FHSS +RZHYHUWKHWHOHPHWU\
V\VWHPFDQQRWEHXVHGZLWK6)+66 7KHXVDEOHUHFHLYHUVDUHVKRZQEHORZ
Communications System
Usable Receivers
T-FHSS Air
（Default）
R3001SB, R3004SB, R3006SB, R3008SB
S-FHSS
（Change is possible）
R2001SB, R2008SB, R2006GS, R2106GF
NOTE：
*The Futaba T-FHSS Air system cannot be used with Futaba S-FHSS/FASST/FASSTest systems. Use
it with a T-FHSS Air system transmitter and receiver. The T10J is a T-FHSS Air systemEXWFDQDOVR
be used with an S-FHSS receiver by switching to S-FHSS+RZHYHULQWKLVFDVHWKHWHOHPHWU\V\VWHP
cannot be used.
*The T-FHSS Air system and T-FHSS surface system are different. The T10J cannot be used with the
R334SB, R334SB-E or T-FHSS surface system receivers.
13
The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog for
more information:
‡+7)%7UDQVPLWWHUEDWWHU\SDFNWKH P$K WUDQVPLWWHU1L0+EDWWHU\SDFNPD\EHHDVLO\
H[FKDQJHGZLWKDIUHVKRQHWRSURYLGHHQRXJKFDSDFLW\IRUH[WHQGHGÀ\LQJVHVVLRQV
‡)7)%7UDQVPLWWHU/L)HEDWWHU\SDFNFDQDOVREHXVHG+RZHYHUFKDUJHZLWKWKHFKDUJHURQO\IRU
LiFe.
Before use
‡7UDLQHUFRUGWKHRSWLRQDOWUDLQLQJFRUGPD\EHXVHGWRKHOSDEHJLQQLQJSLORWOHDUQWRÀ\HDVLO\E\SODFLQJ
the instructor on a separate transmitter. Note that the T10J transmitter may be connected to another T10J
V\VWHPDVZHOODVWRDQ\RWKHUPRGHOVRI)XWDEDWUDQVPLWWHUV7KH7-WUDQVPLWWHUXVHVRQHRIWKHWKUHH
FRUGSOXJW\SHVDFFRUGLQJWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHUFRQQHFWHG 5HIHUWRWKHGHVFULSWLRQDWWKH75$,1(5IXQFWLRQ
LQVWUXFWLRQV 7KHSDUWQXPEHURIWKLVFRUGLV)870
• Servos - there are various kinds of servos. Please choose the Futaba servos best suited for the model and
SXUSRVH\RXDUHXVLQJWKHPIRU,I\RXXWLOL]HD6%86V\VWHP\RXVKRXOGFKRRVHD6%86VHUYR
‡7HOHPHWU\VHQVRUSOHDVHSXUFKDVHDQRSWLRQDOVHQVRULQRUGHUWRXWLOL]HELGLUHFWLRQDOFRPPXQLFDWLRQ
system and to acquire the information from a model high up in the sky.
[Temperature sensor : SBS-01T] [Altitude sensor : SBS-01A] [RPM sensor magnet type : SBS-01RM]
[RPM sensor optical type : SBS-01RO] [GPS sensor : SBS-01G] [Voltage sensor : SBS-01V]
• Neckstrap - a neckstrap can be connected to your T10J system to make it easier to handle and improve
\RXUÀ\LQJSUHFLVLRQVLQFH\RXUKDQGVZRQ¶WQHHGWRVXSSRUWWKHWUDQVPLWWHU¶VZHLJKW
‡<KDUQHVVHVVHUYRH[WHQVLRQVKXEHWF*HQXLQH)XWDEDH[WHQVLRQVDQG<KDUQHVVHVLQFOXGLQJDKHDY\
GXW\YHUVLRQZLWKKHDYLHUZLUHDUHDYDLODEOHWRDLGLQ\RXUODUJHUPRGHODQGRWKHULQVWDOODWLRQV
• Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros is available for your aircraft or helicopter needs.
• Governor - for helicopter use. Automatically adjusts throttle servo position to maintain a constant head
VSHHGUHJDUGOHVVRIEODGHSLWFKORDGZHDWKHUHWF
• Receivers - various models of Futaba receivers may be purchased for use in other models. (Receivers for
7)+66$LU6)+66W\SHVDUHDYDLODEOH
14
TRANSMITTER CONTROLS - AIRPLANE
Built-in Antenna
Carrying Handle
VR
Flap Trim Control
Digital Trim 5
/CH7 Control
This controls CH6, and if flaperon mixing
is activated controls the flap.
SW(C)
Elevator - Flap Mixing or
Airbrake Mixing Switch
SW(B)
Rudder Dual Rate Switch
SW(A)
Elevator Dual Rate
Switch
SW(H)
SW(E)
Landing Gear
Switch
/CH5
SW(G)
Before use
SW(D)
Aileron Dual Rate Switch
SW(F)
Snap Roll or
Trainer Switch
Digital Trim 6
/CH8 Control
Rudder
/Throttle
Stick
Elevator
/Aileron
Stick
Power
LED
Elevator Trim Lever
Throttle
Trim Lever
Aileron Trim Lever
Rudder
Trim Lever
＋ Key
− Key
END Key
Jog Key
Power Switch
(Up position: ON)
LCD Panel
Hook
(for optional neckstrap)
7KLV¿JXUHVKRZVWKHGHIDXOWVZLWFKDVVLJQPHQWVIRUD-$0RGH IRU86$ V\VWHPDV
supplied by the factory.
You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position
within the setting menu for the function you wish to move.
15
TRANSMITTER CONTROLS - HELI
Built-in Antenna
Carrying Handle
VR
CH8 Knob
Digital Trim 5
SW(C)
Governor Switch/CH7
SW(B)
Rudder Dual Rate Switch
Before use
SW(A)
Elevator Dual Rate
Switch
SW(F)
Idle-up 3 Switch
/Gyro/CH5
SW(D)
Aileron Dual Rate Switch
SW(H)
Trainer Switch
SW(E)
SW(G)
Throttle - Hold Switch
Idle-up 1&2
Switch
Digital Trim 6
Throttle/Collective
Pitch & Rudder Stick
Elevator
/Aileron
Stick
Power
LED
Throttle/Collective
Pitch Trim Lever
Elevator Trim Lever
Aileron Trim Lever
Rudder
Trim Lever
＋ Key
− Key
END Key
Jog Key
Power Switch
(Up position: ON)
LCD Panel
Hook
(for optional neckstrap)
7KLV¿JXUHVKRZVWKHGHIDXOWVZLWFKDVVLJQPHQWVIRUD-+0RGHV\VWHPDVVXSSOLHG
by the factory.
You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position
within the setting menu for the function you wish to move.
16
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF THE TRANSMITTER BATTERY
The T10J transmitter is designed to work with
HLWKHU IRXU $$ DONDOLQH GU\ FHOO EDWWHULHV
RU +7)%)7)% EDWWHU\ SDFN ERWK
available separately. The transmitter batteries
used are a matter of personal preference. AA
Alkaline batteries are available at any local
KREE\VKRSJURFHU\VWRUHHWF$EDWWHU\SDFN
will need to be purchased from a hobby shop.
Before use
Push and slide down
Remove the battery BOX if you choose
to use the optional HT5F1800B/FT2F2100B
EDWWHU\SDFNZKLFKFDQEHUHFKDUJHGIURPWKH
transmitter.
And "BATT TYPE" in a PARAMETER is
changed into "HT5F1800B : 5.0V FT2F2100B :
5.8V ".
Battery cover
WARNING
Be careful not to drop the battery.
Never disconnect the battery connector
from the T1- transmitter after
turning off the power until the screen is
completely blank and the transmitter has
shut down completely.
,QWHUQDOGHYLFHVVXFKDVPHPRULHVPD\EHGDPDJHG
,IWKHUHLVDQ\SUREOHPWKHPHVVDJH%DFNXS(UURU
will be shown the next time when you turn on the
power of the transmitter. Do not use the transmitter as
it is. Send it to the Futaba Service Center.
NOTE: If you need to remove or replace the
transmitter battery, do not pull strongly on the
battery wires to remove it. Insert the connector
straight as shown.
Do not connect any other chargers except
the special charger to this charging
connector.
The voltage drop characteristics of a
rechargeable battery and dry cell battery
are different. Change the battery alarm
voltage to 5.V for the HT5F18B and
to 5.8V for the FT2F21B.
NOTE: This plug is for charging HT5F1800B.
The other battery cannot be charged.
FT2F2100B is removed from a transmitter, and
charges with an exclusive charger(LBC-4E5).
17
SWITCH ASSIGNMENT TABLE
• The factory default functions activated by the switches and VR for an 10JA Mode 2 for USA
transmitter are shown below.
• Most 10J functions may be reassigned to non-default positions quickly and easily.
• Basic control assignments of channels 5-10 are quickly adjustable in AUX-CH.
• Note that most functions need to be activated in the programming to operate.
‡ -+-$ DQG -$ 0RGH IRU 86$ WUDQVPLWWHU IXQFWLRQV DUH VLPLODU EXW UHYHUVH FHUWDLQ
switch commands. Always check that you have the desired switch assignment for each function
during set up.
ŔœŭŤŃŏŃŔœŭūŏŃƗƋƈŃŷŲųŃŵŬŪūŷŃŶźŬŷŦūŨŶŃƄƕƈŃƖƓƕƌƑƊŐƏƒƄƇƈƇŃƄƑƇŃŕŐƓƒƖƌƗƌƒƑ
Before use
Switch ／ VR
Switch A
ACRO
Elevator D/R ／ CH9
HELI
Elevator D/R ／ CH9
Switch B
Switch C
Rudder D/R
(UP) ELE → FLP
(Center/Down) Idle down
(Down) Air brake
Aileron D/R ／ CH10
Rudder D/R
Governor ／ 7CH
Switch D
Switch E
Switch F
Switch G
Switch H
VR
DT5
DT6
Gear ／ 5CH
Snap roll ／ Trainer
Flap ／ 6CH
7CH
8CH
MULTICOPTER
Glider A-1
Glider A-2
Glider AF1
Glider AF2
Glider AF4
Elevator D/R ／ CH9 Elevator D/R Elevator D/R Elevator D/R Elevator D/R Elevator D/R
／ CH9
／ CH9
／ CH9
／ CH9
Rudder D/R
Rudder D/R Rudder D/R Rudder D/R Rudder D/R Rudder D/R
6CH
Aileron D/R ／ CH10
Aileron D/R ／ CH10
Idle up1,2
5CH
Idle up3 ／ Gyro ／ 5CH
Throttle hold
Throttle cut ／ Trainer
Trainer
Hovering pitch ／ CH8
7CH
8CH
Aileron D/R
Aileron D/R
Aileron D/R
Aileron D/R
Aileron D/R
6CH
Trainer
10CH
5CH
8CH
6CH
Trainer
10CH
5CH
8CH
6CH
Trainer
10CH
Flap(5CH)
8CH
Trainer
10CH
Flap(5/6CH)
8CH
Trainer
10CH
Flap(5/6CH)
Flap(8/9CH)
ŔœŭŤŃŰƒƇƈŃŕŃƗƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕƖŃƉƒƕŃŸŶŤŏŃƗƋƈŃŷŲųŃůŨũŷŃŶźŬŷŦūŨŶŃƄƕƈŃƖƓƕƌƑƊŐƏƒƄƇƈƇŃƄƑƇŃŕŐƓƒƖƌƗƌƒƑ
Switch ／ VR
Switch A
ACRO
Elevator D/R ／ CH9
HELI
Elevator D/R ／ CH9
Switch B
Switch C
Rudder D/R
(UP) ELE → FLP
(Center/Down) Idle down
(Down) Air brake
Aileron D/R ／ CH10
Gear ／ 5CH
Snap roll ／ Trainer
Rudder D/R
Governor ／ 7CH
Switch D
Switch E
Switch F
Switch G
Switch H
VR
DT5
DT6
Flap ／ 6CH
7CH
8CH
MULTICOPTER
Glider A-1
Glider A-2
Glider AF1
Glider AF2
Glider AF4
Elevator D/R ／ CH9 Elevator D/R Elevator D/R Elevator D/R Elevator D/R Elevator D/R
／ CH9
／ CH9
／ CH9
／ CH9
Rudder D/R
Rudder D/R Rudder D/R Rudder D/R Rudder D/R Rudder D/R
6CH
Aileron D/R ／ CH10
Aileron D/R ／ CH10
Throttle hold
5CH
Trainer
Trainer
Idle up1,2
Throttle cut ／ Idle up3
／ Gyro ／ 5CH
Hovering pitch ／ CH8
7CH
8CH
Aileron D/R
Aileron D/R
Aileron D/R
Aileron D/R
Aileron D/R
Trainer
6CH
Trainer
6CH
Trainer
6CH
Trainer
Trainer
10CH
5CH
8CH
10CH
5CH
8CH
10CH
Flap(5CH)
8CH
10CH
Flap(5/6CH)
8CH
10CH
Flap(5/6CH)
Flap(8/9CH)
2QWKH-$0RGHIRU86$WUDQVPLWWHUVWKH723/()7SWITCHES are spring-loaded and 2-position; on the 10JA
0RGH -+ WKRVH VZLWFKHV DUH RQ WKH ULJKW VLGH )RU FRQVLVWHQF\ WKH VZLWFK SRVLWLRQ¶V GHVLJQDWLRQ UHPDLQV WKH
VDPH XSSHUOHIWLV)HWF EXWWKHIXQFWLRQVDUHPRYHGWRPDWFKWKHVZLWFKW\SH
TO TURN ON THE 10J SYSTEM
First make sure the throttle stick is in the low throttle position.
Push up to turn on.
,IWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNLVQRWLQWKHORZSRVLWLRQ\RX OOKDYHDQDODUPXQWLOWKHVWLFNLVLQWKHORZ
position.（,QWKHFDVHRI0XOWLFRSWHUPRGHWKURWWOHSRVLWLRQ DODUPGRHVQRWRFFXU
18
RECEIVER AND SERVO CONNECTIONS
Aircraft
*When using 8 or more channels, use an S.BUS
function or use a second R3008SB and link
both to your transmitter.
Aileron Differential mode (AILE-DIFF Flaperon mode.
3
8VLQJ6HFRQG$LOHURQRSWLRQVHFRQG$LOHURQVHUYRRXWSXWLVVHQW
to channels 5 and 6. ( AILE-2
4
AILEVATOR GXDOHOHYDWRU PRGH
5
ELEVON mode.
1
(Wing Type)
2
)/$3(521
AIL1
FLP2
(CH1)
(Tail Type)
1250$/
ELE
(CH2)
97$,/
ELE1
RUD2
(CH2)
ELE2
RUD1
(CH4)
$,/9$725
ELE1
AIL3
(CH2)
ELE2
AIL4
(CH8)
(/(921
AIL1
ELE2
(CH1)
Before use
Receiver
Output and
Aircraft (ACRO)
Channel
1
Ailerons/Aileron-11/combined Flap-2 & Aileron-12/combined Aileron-1 &
Elevator-25
2
Elevator/combined Aileron-2 & Elevator-15
3
Throttle
4
Rudder
5
Landing gear/Aileron-2/combined Flap-1 and Aileron-2
6
)ODS V FRPELQHG)ODSDQG$LOHURQ2
7
Aileron-21
8
Elevator-24/Mixture control
9
AU9
10
AU0
AIL2
FLP1
(CH6)
)/$3
AIL2
ELE1
(CH2)
AIL1
(CH1)
AIL
(CH1)
FLP
(CH6)
AIL2
(CH7)
Multicopter
Receiver
Output and
Multicopter (MULTI COPT)
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
$LOHURQ 0XOWLFRSWHU&RQWUROOHU
(OHYDWRU 0XOWLFRSWHU&RQWUROOHU
7KURWWOH 0XOWLFRSWHU&RQWUROOHU
5XGGHU 0XOWLFRSWHU&RQWUROOHU
0RGH 0XOWLFRSWHU&RQWUROOHU
AU6 :KHQ XVLQJ D *<52 6(16 IXQFWLRQ &+ LV XVHG IRU 0RGH
0XOWLFRSWHU&RQWUROOHU 7
AU7
8
AU8
9
AU9
10
AU0
*Use the controller of multicopter corresponding to Futaba.
19
RECEIVER AND SERVO CONNECTIONS
*When using 8 or more channels, use an S.BUS
function or use a second R3008SB and link
both to your transmitter.
Receiver
Helicopter (HELI)
Output and
Before use
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
$LOHURQ F\FOLFUROO (OHYDWRU F\FOLFSLWFK Throttle
Rudder
Gyro
3LWFK FROOHFWLYHSLWFK AU7/Governor
AU8/ELE2/Mixture control
AU9
AU0
(Swash Type)
(Normal linkage type)
H-1: each servo linked
to the swashplate
independently.
$,/‫؟‬$LOHURQ6HUYR
(/(‫(؟‬OHYDWRU6HUYR
3,7‫؟‬3LWFK6HUYR
20
RECEIVER AND SERVO CONNECTIONS
*When using 8 or more channels, use an S.BUS
function or use a second R3008SB and link
both to your transmitter.
Glider
$,/ $
1 Aileron
$,/ $
2 Aileron
$) $)
2 Aileron
1 Flap
$) $)
2 Aileron
2 Flap
$) $)
2 Aileron
4 Flap
1
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
2
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
3
Motor
Motor
Motor
Motor
Motor
4
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
5
AU5
AU5
Flap
Flap
Flap
6
AU6
AU6
AU6
Flap2
Flap2
7
AU7
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
8
AU8
AU8
AU8
AU8
Flap3
9
AU9
AU9
AU9
AU9
Flap4
10
AU0
AU01
AU01
AU01
AU01
Before use
CH
:KHQ&DPEHU0L[LVEHLQJXVHGLWRSHUDWHV
together with AU0.
1
（Wing type）
$,/ $‫ك‬
$,/ $‫ك‬
$,/)/3 $)‫ك‬
Aileron1
(CH1)
Aileron1
(CH1)
Aileron2
(CH7)
Aileron2
(CH7)
Aileron１servo
(CH1)
Flap
(CH5)
$,/)/3 $)‫ك‬
Aileron1
Flap1
(CH1)
(CH5)
Flap2
(CH6)
$,/)/3 $)‫ك‬
Aileron1
(CH1)
Flap1
(CH5)
Aileron2
(CH7)
Flap3
(CH8)
Flap4
(CH9)
Flap2
(CH6)
Aileron2
(CH7)
（Tail type）
‫ق‬1RUPDO‫ك‬
Elevator
(CH2)
‫ۋق‬WDLO‫ك‬
Elevator1
Rudder2
(CH2)
Elevator2
Rudder1
(CH4)
21
CHARGING THE BATTERIES (When the rechargeable battery option is used)
Charging <our System¶s Batteries
1. Connect the transmitter charging jack and batteries to the transmitter and receiver connectors
of the charger.
2. Plug the charger into a wall socket.
3. Check that the charger LED lights.
Charger
TX: Transmitter charging indicator
RX: Receiver charging indicator
Before use
To transmitter charging jack
Receiver battery
According to the description of the battery to be used
DQG LWV H[FOXVLYH FKDUJHU SOHDVH XVH LW DIWHU FDUU\LQJ
out full charge.
We recommend charging the batteries with the
charger supplied with your system. Note that the
use of a fast charger may damage the batteries by
overheating and dramatically reduce their lifetime.
: K H Q + 7)% L V F K R V H Q + % & $ L V
recommended.
:KHQ FKDUJLQJ )7)% SOHDVH PDNH VXUH WR
remove the battery from the system to charge it.
Charger for this battery is recommended to use LBC4E5.
Battery Care and Precautions
Below you will find some general rules and guidelines which should be adhered to when
charging transmitter and/or receiver battery packs. These are included to serve only as general
JXLGHOLQHVDQGDUHQRWLQWHQGHGWRUHSODFHRUVXSHUVHGHWKHLQIRUPDWLRQSURYLGHGE\WKHEDWWHU\
DQGRUFKDUJHUPDQXIDFWXUHU)RUFRPSOHWHLQIRUPDWLRQSOHDVHUHIHUWRWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVWKDWDUH
LQFOXGHGZLWKWKHEDWWHU\SDFN V DQGRUFKDUJHUVWKDWDFFRPSDQ\WKHSURGXFWVSXUFKDVHG
• Do not allow children to charge battery packs without adult supervision.
• Do not charge battery packs that have been damaged in any way. We strongly suggest frequent
inspection of the battery packs to ensure that no damage has occurred.
• 'R QRW WR DOORZ EDWWHULHV WR RYHUKHDW ,I RYHUKHDWHG GLVFRQQHFW WKH EDWWHU\ IURP WKH FKDUJHU
immediately and allow to cool.
• 'RQRWPL[FHOOVDOOFHOOVVKRXOGEHRIWKHVDPHPDWHULDOFRQ¿JXUDWLRQHWF
• Do not deep cycle NiMH batteries as permanent damage could result.
• 1HYHUFKDUJHEDWWHULHVRQDVXUIDFHWKDWPD\EHFRPHKRWRUPD\EHLPSDFWHGE\WKHKHDW
• ,PPHGLDWHO\HQGWKHFKDUJLQJSURFHGXUHLIHLWKHUWKHEDWWHULHVRUFKDUJHULWVHOIEHFRPHRYHUO\KRW
• 1L0+FHOOVGRQRWH[KLELWWKH³PHPRU\HIIHFW´OLNH1L&GFHOOVVROLWWOHF\FOLQJLVQHHGHG6WRUH
1L0+SDFNVZLWKVRPHYROWDJHUHPDLQLQJRQWKHFHOOV UHIHUWREDWWHU\VXSSOLHU • NiMH cells have a self-discharge rate of approximately 20-25% (compared to 15% for NiCd
EDWWHULHV ,WLVLPSRUWDQWWRUHFKDUJH1L0+EDWWHULHVLPPHGLDWHO\SULRUWRXVH
• Never connect the battery in reverse. Reverse connection will cause the battery to overheat or
will damage the inside of the charger.
• Do not add an additional charge after charging.
• 1HYHUFKDUJHZLWKDFXUUHQWH[FHHGLQJWKHQRPLQDOFDSDFLW\ O& RIWKHUHFKDUJHDEOHEDWWHU\
• ,IDEDWWHU\LVFKDUJHGZLWKDFXUUHQWH[FHHGLQJ&WKHEDWWHU\ZLOORYHUKHDWDQGGHWHULRUDWH
• Do not connect two battery packs or more to one output terminal.
• Avoid extremely cold and hot places and the direct sunlight when you charge batteries.
• ,WLVUHFRPPHQGHGWRSHUIRUPFKDUJLQJZLWKLQWKHaƒ& ƒ) UDQJH2WKHUZLVHLWPD\
cause abnormal charging and overheat.
22
ADJUSTING THE LENGTH OF THE CONTROL STICKS
Stick tip A
Locking piece B
You may change the length of the control sticks to make
your transmitter more comfortable to hold and operate. To
OHQJWKHQ RU VKRUWHQ \RXU WUDQVPLWWHU¶V VWLFNV ILUVW XQORFN
the stick tip by holding locking piece B and turning stick
WLS$ FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH 1H[W PRYH WKH ORFNLQJ SLHFH %
XSRUGRZQ WROHQJWKHQRUVKRUWHQ :KHQWKHOHQJWKIHHOV
FRPIRUWDEOH ORFN WKH SRVLWLRQ E\ WXUQLQJ ORFNLQJ SLHFH %
counterclockwise.
STICK LEVER TENSION ADJUSTMENT
Four screws are
removed and rear
case is removed.
Elevator
Before use
<RXPD\DGMXVWWKHWHQVLRQRI\RXUVWLFNVWRSURYLGHWKHIHHOWKDW\RXSUHIHUIRUÀ\LQJ7RDGMXVW
\RXU VSULQJV \RX¶OO KDYH WR UHPRYH WKH UHDU FDVH RI WKH WUDQVPLWWHU )LUVW UHPRYH WKH EDWWHU\
FRYHURQWKHUHDURIWKHWUDQVPLWWHU1H[WXQSOXJWKHEDWWHU\ZLUHDQGUHPRYHWKHEDWWHU\IURP
WKHWUDQVPLWWHU1H[WXVLQJDVFUHZGULYHUUHPRYHWKHIRXUVFUHZVWKDWKROGWKHWUDQVPLWWHU¶VUHDU
FRYHULQSRVLWLRQDQGSXWWKHPLQDVDIHSODFH*HQWO\HDVHRIIWKHWUDQVPLWWHU¶VUHDUFRYHU1RZ
\RX¶OOVHHWKHYLHZVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUHDERYH
8VLQJDVPDOO3KLOOLSVVFUHZGULYHUURWDWHWKHDGMXVWLQJVFUHZIRUHDFKVWLFNIRUWKHGHVLUHGVSULQJ
tension. The tension increases when the adjusting screw is turned clockwise. When you are
VDWLV¿HGZLWKWKHVSULQJWHQVLRQVUHDWWDFKWKHWUDQVPLWWHU VUHDUFRYHU:KHQWKHFRYHULVSURSHUO\
LQSODFHUHLQVWDOODQGWLJKWHQWKHIRXUVFUHZV5HLQVWDOOWKHEDWWHU\DQGFRYHU
Rudder
Aileron
Stick
Stick
Mode 2 transmitter with rear case removed.
+ screw is clockwise.
+ screw is counter-clockwise.
Do not loosen
the screw past
the top of the
frame, as this
will cause the
screw to rub on
the back case.
Stick tension maximum
Stick tension minimum
※A screw touches a case.
23
ADJUSTING DISPLAY CONTRAST
7RDGMXVWWKHGLVSOD\FRQWUDVWIURPWKHKRPHPHQXSUHVVDQGKROGWKHEND BUTTON.
Push the ＋− KEY while still holding the END BUTTON:
＋ KEY to brighten
− KEY to darken the display
＋ Key
END Key
1.Press and hold
2.Push the +key
Before use
Bright
END Key
− Key
1.Press and hold
2.Push the −key
Dark
CONNECTOR / PLUG
Trainer function connector
:KHQ\RXXVHWKHWUDLQHUIXQFWLRQFRQQHFWWKH
optional trainer cable between the transmitters
for teacher and student.
*You can set the trainer function on the Trainer Function
screen.
Trainer function
connector
Earphone
plug
24
S.BUS
FRQQHFWRU 6,)
S.BUS connector (S.I/F)
When setting an S.BUS servo and telemetry
VHQVRUFRQQHFWWKHPERWKKHUH
6XSSO\SRZHUE\ZD\KXERUZD\FRUG
Earphone plug
The telemetry data can be listened to by
plugging in commercial 3.5mm earphones. (See
WKHWHOHPHWU\LWHPIRUWKHGHWDLOHGVHWWLQJ
TRANSMITTER DISPLAYS & BUTTONS
:KHQ\RX¿UVWWXUQRQ\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUDFRQ¿UPDWLRQGRXEOHEHHSVRXQGVDQGWKHVFUHHQVKRZQ
EHORZ DSSHDUV %HIRUH À\LQJ RU HYHQ VWDUWLQJ WKH HQJLQH EH VXUH WKDW WKH PRGHO W\SH DQG QDPH
DSSHDULQJRQWKHGLVSOD\PDWFKHVWKHPRGHOWKDW\RXDUHDERXWWRÀ\,I\RXDUHLQWKHZURQJPRGHO
PHPRU\VHUYRVPD\EHUHYHUVHGDQGWUDYHOVDQGWULPVZLOOEHZURQJSRWHQWLDOO\OHDGLQJWRDFUDVK
Edit buttons and Start-up Screen (appears when system is ¿rst turned on):
Total timer display <TIMER>
Shows the cumulated ON time. (hours:minutes)
Up/down timer display <ST1.ST2>
(minutes:seconds)
Model timer display <MDL>
Shows the cumulated ON time for each model.(hours:minutes)
System timer display <SYS>
Shows the cumulated ON time.(hours:minutes)
Timers
Model number
and name
Throttle trim
display
Model type
System
"T-FHSS" "S-FHSS"
Output display
Battery
voltage Telemetry
Receiving accuracy
Before use
Resetting timers:
Select the desired timer with JOG KEY. The timer display
flashes. To reset the timer, press JOG KEY.
Press and hold ＋ KEY for one
second to open programming
menus.
Elevator trim
display
−key
END
Key
＋key
Jog key
Rudder trim
display
Aileron trim
display
JOG KEY:
Control JOG KEY to scroll up/scroll down/scroll left/scroll right and select the option to edit within a
IXQFWLRQ:KHQWKHPHQXKDVPXOWLSOHSDJHVPRYHWKHJOG KEY KRUL]RQWDOO\ OHIWRUULJKW Press JOG KEY to select the actual function you wish to edit from the menu.
Press JOG KEY DQG KROG RQH VHFRQG WR FRQILUP PDMRU GHFLVLRQV VXFK DV WKH GHFLVLRQ WR VHOHFW
D GLIIHUHQW PRGHO IURP PHPRU\ FRS\ RQH PRGHO PHPRU\ RYHU DQRWKHU WULP UHVHW VWRUH FKDQQHO
SRVLWLRQLQ)DLO6DIHFKDQJHPRGHOW\SHUHVHWHQWLUHPRGHOFRQGLWLRQRIDKHOLFRSWHUVHWXSLVFKDQJHG
An on screen inquiry will ask if you are sure.
Press JOG KEY again to accept the change.
＋ KEY:
Press and hold ＋ KEYIRURQHVHFRQGWRRSHQSURJUDPPLQJPHQXV,WLVXVHGIRUFKDQJLQJDVHWXS
or a numerical increase. Changing the menus pages can also be performed.
− KEY:
,WLVXVHGIRUFKDQJHRIDVHWXSRUUHGXFWLRQRIDQXPEHU&KDQJHRIWKHSDJHRIDPHQXFDQDOVREH
performed.
END BUTTON:
3UHVV(1'%87721WRUHWXUQWRSUHYLRXVVFUHHQFORVHIXQFWLRQVEDFNWRPHQXVDQGFORVHPHQXVWR
start-up screen.
25
WARNING & ERROR DISPLAYS
An alarm or error indication may appear on the display of your transmitter for a number of
UHDVRQV LQFOXGLQJ ZKHQ WKH WUDQVPLWWHU SRZHU VZLWFK LV WXUQHG RQ ZKHQ WKH EDWWHU\ YROWDJH LV
ORZDQGVHYHUDORWKHUV(DFKGLVSOD\KDVDXQLTXHVRXQGDVVRFLDWHGZLWKLWDVGHVFULEHGEHORZ
LOW BATTERY ERROR: Warning sound: Continuous beep until transmitter is powered off.
The LOW BATTERY warning is displayed when the transmitter battery voltage drops below 4.1V.
/and your model as soon as possible before loss of control
due to a dead battery.
Before use
MIXING ALERT WARNING: Warning sound: Several beeps repeated until problem resolved or
overridden.
The MIXING ALERT warning is displayed to alert you whenever
you turn on the transmitter with any of the mixing switches
active. This warning will disappear when the offending switch
or control is deactivated. Switches for which warnings will be
LVVXHGDWSRZHUXSDUHOLVWHGEHORZ7KURWWOHFXWLGOHGRZQVQDSUROODLUEUDNHWKURWWOHVWLFN
DQGFRQGLWLRQPRWRU6:,IWXUQLQJDVZLWFK2))GRHVQRWVWRSWKHPL[LQJZDUQLQJ7KH
functions described previously probably use the same switch and the OFF direction setting
LVUHYHUVHG,QVKRUWRQHRIWKHPL[LQJVGHVFULEHGDERYHLVQRWLQWKH2))VWDWH,QWKLVFDVH
reset the warning display by pressing both ＋ / − KEYDWWKHVDPHWLPH1H[WFKDQJHRQH
of the switch settings of the duplicated mixings.
,I(6&PRGHLVFKRVHQE\7+5&87D7+5&87ZLOOQRWVWDUWZDUQLQJ
BACKUP ERROR::DUQLQJVRXQG6HYHUDOEHHSV UHSHDWHGFRQWLQXRXVO\
The BACKUP ERROR ZDUQLQJ RFFXUV ZKHQ WKH WUDQVPLWWHU PHPRU\ LV ORVW IRU DQ\ UHDVRQ ,I WKLV
RFFXUVDOORIWKHGDWDZLOOEHUHVHWZKHQWKHSRZHULVWXUQHGRQDJDLQ
Do not Ày when this message is displayed: all programming
has been erased and is not available. Return your transmitter to
Futaba for service.
A setup of warning of each sensor can be performed in TELEMETRY.
TM mark is shown about warning of TE/EMETR<.
26
LINK PROCEDURE (T10J/R3008SB)
(DFKWUDQVPLWWHUKDVDQLQGLYLGXDOO\DVVLJQHGXQLTXH,'FRGH,QRUGHUWRVWDUWRSHUDWLRQWKH
UHFHLYHUPXVWEHOLQNHGZLWKWKH,'FRGHRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHUZLWKZKLFKLWLVEHLQJSDLUHG2QFHWKH
OLQNLVPDGHWKH,'FRGHLVVWRUHGLQWKHUHFHLYHUDQGQRIXUWKHUOLQNLQJLVQHFHVVDU\XQOHVVWKH
UHFHLYHULVWREHXVHGZLWKDQRWKHUWUDQVPLWWHU:KHQ\RXSXUFKDVHDGGLWLRQDO56%UHFHLYHUV
this procedure is necessary; otherwise the receiver will not work.
/ink procedure
1. Place the transmitter and the receiver
close to each other within 20 inches(half
meter).
Less than 20 inches
5. Hold down the jog key to enter the link
mode.
6. A chime from the transmitter notifies the
operator that the transmitter has entered
the link mode.
“Beep beep beep”
(Enters the link mode for 20 seconds)
In "Link" Mode
,IWKHUHDUHPDQ\7)+66$LUV\VWHPVWXUQHGRQLQFORVH
SUR[LPLW\\RXUUHFHLYHUPLJKWKDYHGLI¿FXOW\HVWDEOLVKLQJ
a link to your transmitter. This is a rare occurrence.
+RZHYHUVKRXOGDQRWKHU7)+66$LUWUDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHU
EHOLQNLQJDWWKHVDPHWLPH\RXUUHFHLYHUFRXOGOLQNWR
the wrong transmitter. This is very dangerous if you do
QRWQRWLFHWKLVVLWXDWLRQ,QRUGHUWRDYRLGWKHSUREOHPZH
strongly recommend you to double check whether your
receiver is really under control by your transmitter.
:KHQ WKH OLQNHG WUDQVPLWWHU SRZHU LV WXUQHG RQ
communications begins.
:KHQXVLQJUHFHLYHUVSHUIRUPWKHOLQNLQJRSHUDWLRQWKH
VDPHDVWKHVWUHFHLYHU +RZHYHUZKHQUHFHLYHUVDUH
XVHGWKHWHOHPHWU\V\VWHPFDQQRWEHXVHG
*Link is required when a new model is made from a model
selection.
Before use
2. Turn on the transmitter.
3. Select [MDL-SEL] and access the setup
screen shown below by press the jog key .
4. Use the jog key to select (NO LINK) or the
ID number next to LINK in the [MDL-SEL]
menu.
8. If the receiver ID is displayed in the
transmitter and the LED changed from red
blinking to a steady green light, linking is
complete. (The receiver linking wait state
ends in about 3 seconds.)
9. Check system operation. If the transmitter
and receiver are not linked, try linking
again.
WARNING
After the linking is done, please cycle
receiver power and check that the receiver
to be linked is really under the control of
the transmitter.
Don t perform the linking procedure with
motor s main wire connected or with the
engine operating as it may result in serious
injury.
Receiver ON
7. Immediately turn on the receiver power.
The receiver will enter the linking state
(LED blinks red) about 3 seconds after the
receiver power is turned on.
27
RECEIVER NOMENCLATURE
Danger
%HIRUHXVLQJWKHUHFHLYHUEHVXUHWRUHDGWKHSUHFDXWLRQVOLVWHGLQ
the following pages.
5HFHLYHU
Receiver R38SB
Do not connect either a switch
or battery in this manner.
Danger
Connector
Before use
"1 through 6": outputs for the channels 1
through 6
"7/B": outputs of 7 channels and power.
%
&+VHUYR
Don t connect a connector, as shown in a
before ¿gure.
,WZLOOVKRUWFLUFXLWLIFRQQHFWHGLQWKLVZD\$VKRUWFLUFXLW
DFURVVWKHEDWWHU\WHUPLQDOVPD\FDXVHDEQRUPDOKHDWLQJ
¿UHDQGEXUQV
Don t connect servo for conventional
system to S.BUS/S.BUS2 port.
'LJLWDOVHUYRIRUFRQYHQWLRQDOV\VWHPĺ,WGRHVQRWRSHUDWH
$QDORJVHUYRĺ,WPD\FDXVHDEQRUPDOKHDW¿UHDQGEXUQLQJ
<KDUQHVV
Warning
S.BUS2 connectors
%DWWHU\
"8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.BUS port.
>S.BUS Servo S.BUS Gyro @
:KHQXVLQJ6%DV6%86\RXKDYHWRVHW
CH MODE of the following page to mode B or
mode D.
"S.BUS2": outputs of S.BUS2 port.
>S.BUS2 Servo S.BUS2 Gyro Telemetry Sensor @
:KHQXVLQJRUPRUHFKDQQHOVXVHDQ6%86
function or use a second R3008SB and link both
to your transmitter.
Don t connect an S.BUS servo / gyro to
S.BUS2 connector.
/ED Monitor
This monitor is used to check the CH mode of
the receiver.
Mode Switch
Use the small plastic screw driver that was
included with your receiver.
Switch is also used for the CH mode selection.
Connector insertion
Firmly insert the connector in the direction
VKRZQLQWKH¿JXUH,QVHUWWKH6%86E\WXUQLQJ
it 90 degrees.
28
＋
−
Extra Voltage Connector
Extra Voltage Connector
Use this connector when using a voltage
telemetry device to send the battery voltage (DC0
a9 IURPWKHUHFHLYHUWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
You will need to purchase the optional External
9ROWDJHLQSXWFDEOH &$59,1 )870
You can then make a cable with an extra
connector to the External voltage connector.
Danger
Don t touch wiring.
* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.
Don t short-circuit the battery terminals.
Please double check your polarity ( ＋ and
− ) when hooking up your connectors.
,I＋ and −RIZLULQJDUHPLVWDNHQLWZLOOGDPDJH
ignite and explode.
Don¶t connect to Extra Voltage before
turning on a receiver power supply.
R3008SB CH MODE
The R3008SB receiver is a very versatile
XQLW,WKDV3:0RXWSXWV6%86DQG6%86
outputs. Additionally the PWM outputs can be
FKDQJHGIURPFKDQQHOVWRFKDQQHOV,I
you only desire to use it as an 7 channel receiver
ZLWKRXW 6%86 LW FDQ EH XVHG ZLWKRXW DQ\
setting changes.
The R3008SB is capable of changing its channel
allocations as described in the table below.
1. Turn on the receiver. (At this moment, the
transmitter should be off.) Then, LED blinks
RED in about 3 seconds. Next, wait until it
becomes solid RED.
2. Press and hold the Mode Switch more than
5 seconds.
3. Release the button when the LED blinks
RED and GREEN simultaneously.
4. The receiver is now in the "Operation
CH Set" mode. At this moment, the LED
indicates current set status through Áashing
a pattern that corresponds to the CH
mode.
*Cannot exit this CH setting mode before the operation
PRGHLV¿[HG
*See the below table that shows correspondence between
&+PRGHDQGZD\RIÀDVKLQJ/('
*Default CH mode is "Mode B".
Before use
* A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause
DEQRUPDOKHDWLQJ¿UHDQGEXUQV
How to change the R38SB Channel mode
5. By pressing the Mode Switch, the operation
CH is switched sequentially as "Mode C"
"Mode D" "Mode E" "Mode A"....
6. The operation mode will be set by pressing
the Mode Switch more than 2 seconds at
the desired CH mode.
7. Release the button when the LED blinks
RED and GREEN simultaneously. Then, the
operation CH is Àxed.
8. After confirming the operation CH mode
is changed, turn off and back on the
receiver power.
*The “Operation CH Set” mode cannot be changed during
the receiver communicates to the transmitter.
R3008SB CH Mode table
Output
connector
Channel
1
Mode A
1 〜 8CH
1
Mode B
1 〜 7CH
1
Mode C
9 〜 10CH
9
Mode D
9 〜 10CH
9
Mode E
8 〜 10CH
8
2
2
2
10
10
9
3
3
3
11
11
10
4
4
4
12
12
11
5
5
5
DG1
DG1
12
6
6
6
DG2
DG2
DG1
7/B
7
7
−
−
DG2
8/SB
8
S.BUS
−
S.BUS
S.BUS
Red LED blink
1 time
2 times
3 times
4 times
5 times
Default CH mode
29
RECEIVER's ANTENNA INSTALLATION
7KH 56% KDV WZR DQWHQQDV ,Q RUGHU WR PD[LPL]H VLJQDO UHFHSWLRQ DQG SURPRWH VDIH
modeling Futaba has adopted a diversity antenna system. This allows the receiver to obtain RF
VLJQDOVRQERWKDQWHQQDVDQGÀ\SUREOHPIUHH
*Must be kept as straight as possible.
Antenna
Coaxial cable
R3008SB Receiver
Before use
To obtain the best results of the diversity
I X Q F W L R Q S O H D V H U H I H U W R W K H I R O O R Z L Q J
instructions:
1. The two antennas must be kept as straight
as possible. Otherwise it will reduce the
effective range.
2. The two antennas should be placed at 90
degrees to each other.
Antenna
This is not a critical figure, but the most
important thing is to keep the antennas
away from each other as much as possible.
Larger models can have large metal
objects that can attenuate the RF signal. In
this case the antennas should be placed
at both sides of the model. Then the best
RF signal condition is obtained at any Áying
attitude.
3. The antennas must be kept away from
conductive materials, such as metal,
carbon and fuel tank by at least a half
inch. The coaxial part of the antennas does
not need to follow these guidelines, but do
not bend it in a tight radius.
4. Keep the antennas away from the motor,
ESC, and other noise sources as much as
possible.
Antenna
*The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other.
7KH,OOXVWUDWLRQGHPRQVWUDWHVKRZWKHDQWHQQDVKRXOGEHSODFHG
5HFHLYHU9LEUDWLRQDQG:DWHUSURRILQJ7KHUHFHLYHUFRQWDLQVSUHFLVLRQHOHFWURQLFSDUWV%HVXUHWRDYRLGYLEUDWLRQ
VKRFN DQG WHPSHUDWXUH H[WUHPHV )RU SURWHFWLRQ ZUDS WKH UHFHLYHU LQ IRDP UXEEHU RU RWKHU YLEUDWLRQDEVRUELQJ
PDWHULDOV,WLVDOVRDJRRGLGHDWRZDWHUSURRIWKHUHFHLYHUE\SODFLQJLWLQDSODVWLFEDJDQGVHFXULQJWKHRSHQHQGRIWKH
EDJZLWKDUXEEHUEDQGEHIRUHZUDSSLQJLWZLWKIRDPUXEEHU,I\RXDFFLGHQWDOO\JHWPRLVWXUHRUIXHOLQVLGHWKHUHFHLYHU
\RXPD\H[SHULHQFHLQWHUPLWWHQWRSHUDWLRQRUDFUDVK,ILQGRXEWUHWXUQWKHUHFHLYHUWRRXUVHUYLFHFHQWHUIRUVHUYLFH
30
MOUNTING THE SERVO
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS when
you install receiver and servos
Wood screw
Rubber
grommet
Brass eyelet
2.3-2.6mm nut
washer
Rubber
grommet
Brass eyelet
Servo mount
Servo mount
2.3-2.6mm screw
(Airplane/Glider)
(Helicopter)
Connecting connectors
Be sure to insert the connector until it
stops at the deepest point.
How to protect the receiver from
vibration and water
Wrap the receiver with something soft
such as foam rubber to avoid vibration.
If there is a chance of getting wet, put
the receiver in a waterproof bag or
balloon to avoid water.
Receiver s antenna
Never cut the receiver s antenna. Do
not bind the receiver s antenna with the
cables for servos.
Before use
Servo lead wires
To prevent the servo lead cable from being
EURNHQ E\ YLEUDWLRQ GXULQJ IOLJKW SURYLGH D
little slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable
points. Periodically check the cable during daily
maintenance.
Warning
/ocate the receiver s antenna as far as
possible from metals or carbon fiber
components such as frames, cables, etc.
Margin in the lead wire.
Fasten about 5-10cm
from the servo outlet so
that the lead wire is neat.
&XWWLQJRUELQGLQJWKHUHFHLYHU VDQWHQQDZLOO
UHGXFHWKHUDGLRUHFHSWLRQVHQVLWLYLW\DQGUDQJH
and may cause a crash.
Servo throw
MOUNTING THE POWER
SWITCH
:KHQPRXQWLQJDSRZHUVZLWFKWRDQDLUIUDPH
make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than
the total stroke of the switch so that you can turn
the switch ON/OFF without binding.
Avoid mounting the switch where it can be
FRYHUHGE\HQJLQHRLODQGGXVW,QJHQHUDOLWLV
recommended to mount the power switch on the
VLGHRIWKHIXVHODJHWKDWLVRSSRVLWHWKHPXIÀHU
Adjust your system so that pushrods
will not bind or sag when operating the
servos to the full extent.
,IH[FHVVLYHIRUFHLVFRQWLQXRXVO\DSSOLHGWRD
VHUYRWKHVHUYRFRXOGEHGDPDJHGGXHWRIRUFH
on the gear train and/or power consumption
causing rapid battery drain.
Mounting servos
Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as
rubber grommet) under a servo when
mounting the servo on a servo mount.
And be sure that the servo cases do not
touch directly to the metal parts such as
servo mount.
,IWKHVHUYRFDVHFRQWDFWVWKHDLUIUDPHGLUHFWO\
vibration will travel to and possibly damage the
servo.
31
RANGE CHECK THE RADIO
$UDQJHFKHFNPXVWEHSHUIRUPHGEHIRUHWKH¿UVWÀLJKWRIDQHZPRGHO,WLVQRWQHFHVVDU\WRGR
DUDQJHFKHFNEHIRUHHYHU\ÀLJKW EXWLVQRWDEDGLGHDWRSHUIRUPDUDQJHFKHFNEHIRUHWKH¿UVW
ÀLJKWRIHDFKGD\ $UDQJHFKHFNLVWKH¿QDORSSRUWXQLW\WRUHYHDODQ\UDGLRPDOIXQFWLRQVDQGWR
be certain the system has adequate operational range.
We have installed a special “Power Down Mode” in the T10J in order to perform an operational
JURXQGUDQJHFKHFN'XULQJWKLVPRGHWKH5)SRZHULVUHGXFHGLQRUGHUWRWHVWWKHRSHUDWLRQDO
range of the T10J.
To activate the Power Down Mode and Perform A Range Check:
Before use
7R DFWLYDWH WKH ³3RZHU 'RZQ 0RGH´ SOHDVH KROG
down the JOG KEY and then turn the transmitter switch
on. A power mode screen is displayed. Press the JOG
KEY to select the Power Down function. When this
mode is active the red LED on the lighting from of
the transmitter will provide users with an audible and
visual indication that the transmitter is in the “Power
'RZQ 0RGH´$XGLEO\ WKH WUDQVPLWWHU ZLOO EHHS RQH
WLPHHYHU\WKUHHVHFRQGV9LVXDOO\WKH/&'VFUHHQZLOO
display “POWER DOWN MODE”. The words “POWER
DOWN MODE” will blink as an additional reminder
that the transmitter is in the “Power Down Mode”.
Select the "OFF" and
press the Jog key.
A screen opens without
outputting power.
The receiver does not
operate.
Select the "ON" and
press the Jog key.
Power is usually
outputted from power
mode.
:LWKWKH³3RZHU'RZQ0RGH´DFWLYDWHGZDONDZD\IURPWKHPRGHOZKLOHVLPXOWDQHRXVO\RSHUDWLQJWKHFRQWUROV
+DYHDQDVVLVWDQWVWDQGE\WKHPRGHODQGVLJQDOZKDWWKHFRQWUROVDUHGRLQJWRFRQ¿UPWKDWWKH\RSHUDWHFRUUHFWO\<RX
should be able to walk approximately 30-50 paces from the model without losing control.
,I HYHU\WKLQJ RSHUDWHV FRUUHFWO\ UHWXUQ WR WKH PRGHO 3XVK END KEY and complete power down mode. Set the
transmitter in a safe yet accessible location so it will be within reach after starting the engine. Be certain the throttle
VWLFNLVDOOWKHZD\GRZQDQGWKHQVWDUWWKHHQJLQH3HUIRUPDQRWKHUUDQJHFKHFNZLWK\RXUDVVLVWDQWKROGLQJWKHPRGHO
and the engine running at various speeds.
,I WKH VHUYRV MLWWHU RU PRYH LQDGYHUWHQWO\ WKHUH PD\ EH D SUREOHP 'R 127 À\ WKH DLUFUDIW /RRN IRU ORRVH VHUYR
connections or binding pushrods. Also be certain that the battery has been fully charged.
1(9(5VWDUWÀ\LQJZKHQWKH³3RZHU'RZQ0RGH´LVDFWLYH
Servo test operation at the time of Power Down Mode:
'XULQJ3RZHU'RZQPRGH\RXFDQXVHDXWRPDWLFVHUYRWHVWLQJWRFKHFNWKHUDQJHRIDVSHFL¿HGVHUYR LWPRYHVWR
ULJKWDQGOHIWVORZO\ $6(592LVFKRVHQIURPDPHQX
JOG KEYLVPRYHGWRDVLGHDQGSDJHVLVFDOOHG1H[WJOG KEY is moved down and CH is displayed.
&+RIWKHVHUYRZKLFKZDQWVWRRSHUDWHLVFKRVHQ7KHQWKH+ KEY is pressed and it is made ACT.
7KHVHUYRVHOHFWHGGXULQJ3RZHU'RZQ0RGHRSHUDWHVDORQHDOORZLQJ\RXWRFKHFNLWVRSHUDWLRQ
,WLVGXULQJ3RZHU'RZQ0RGHVWDUWLQJDQGLI6(5927(67LVWXUQHG21LWZLOOPRYH
,QWKH3RZHU'RZQ0RGHWKHWKURWWOHVHUYRGRHVQRWRSHUDWH
+HOLFRSWHUPRGHFRQGLWLRQLV¿[HGWR125
DANGER
NEVER start Àying when the ³Power Down
Mode´ is active. *Control is impossible and your
model crashes.
32
S.BUS/S.BUS2 INSTALLATION
This set uses the S.BUS/S.BUS2 system. The wiring is as simplified and clean mounting as
SRVVLEOH HYHQ ZLWK PRGHOV WKDW XVH D ODUJH QXPEHU RI VHUYRV ,Q DGGLWLRQ WKH ZLQJV FDQ EH
quickly installed to the fuselage without any extraneous wiring by the use of only one simple
ZLUHHYHQZKHQWKHUHDUHDODUJHQXPEHURIVHUYRVXVHG
Ɣ:KHQXVLQJ6%866%86VSHFLDOVHWWLQJVDQGPL[HVLQ\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUPD\EHXQQHFHVVDU\
Ɣ7KH6%866%86VHUYRVPHPRUL]HWKHQXPEHURIFKDQQHOVWKHPVHOYHV 6HWWDEOHZLWKWKH7Ɣ7KH6%866%86V\VWHPDQGFRQYHQWLRQDOV\VWHP UHFHLYHUFRQYHQWLRQDO&+XVHG FDQEHPL[HG
S.BUS
Glider usage example
Receiver: R3008SB
Servo: S3173SVi×9 (Optional)
HUB×1 (Optional)
i-i Connector (Optional)
i Connector (Optional)
* i-i Connector makes S.BUS connection
of SVi servo to SVi servo.
Before use
i-i Connector (Optional)
* i Connector makes S.BUS
connection of SVi servo to receiver.
i-i Connector (Optional)
Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )
S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example
Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )
Switch: HSW-L
Receiver: R3008SB
Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )
HUB×3 ( Optional )
Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional )
Elevator servo: BLS173SVi×2 ( Optional )
33
S.BUS WIRING EXAMPLE
●S.BUS Servo
5HFHLYHU
Since the channel number is
memorized by the S.BUS itself,
any connector can be used.
%DWWHU\
6%86
3RUW
6%
Optional Parts
6ZLWFK
●4-Terminal box
Before use
Four connectors can be inserted
+8%
Optional Parts
+8%
+8%
●6-Terminal box
(TB16PP)
+8%
Six connectors can be inserted
Warning
Power supply
Please make sure that you
use a battery that can deliver
enough capacity for the
number and kind of servos
used. Alkaline batteries
cannot be used.
6%866HUYR
+8%
‫ق‬$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\‫ك‬
6ZLWFK
%DWWHU\
+8%
●When separate power supply used
When a large number of servos are used or
when high current servos are used, the servos
can be driven by a separate power supply by
using a separate Power Supply 3-way Hub.
6%866HUYR
Optional Parts
Orange
34
HUB
Optional Parts
Three connectors
can be inserted.
Green
HUB
Used when using
a separate power
supply battery.
S.BUS2 SYSTEM
:KHQXVLQJWKH6%86SRUWDQLPSUHVVLYHDUUD\RIWHOHPHWU\VHQVRUVPD\EHXWLOL]HG
S.BUS2 TAB/E
Receiver port
S.BUS Servo
S.BUS Gyro
S.BUS2 Servo
S.BUS2 Gyro
Telemetry sensor
S.BUS
○
○
×
S.BUS2
× （※）
○
○
S.BUS servos and gyros and S.BUS2 servos and gyros must be used in the
correct receiver ports. Please refer to the instruction manual to make sure
you connect to the correct one.
&+0RGHLVVHWWR0RGH%>'@
6%86
3RUW
6%
6%86
3RUW
+XE
+XE
6%866HUYR
6%86VHUYR
&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
6%86J\UR
&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH
7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU
&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH
Before use
（※）'RQ WFRQQHFW6%866HUYR
S.BUS Gyro to S.BUS2 connector.
+XE
+XE
6%866HUYR
7HOHPHWU\
6HQVRU
6%86VHUYR
&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH
6%86
*<52
ٔ
5XGGHU6HUYR
35
S.BUS/S.BUS2 DEVICE SETTING
S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the T10J. Channel
setting and other data can be entered for the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or sensors.
%DFNRI7-
Before use
3-way hub
or Y-harnesses
6%866%86
GHYLFH
6%866%86
6HUYR
7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU
36
5HFHLYHUV
%DWWHU\
1. Turn on the transmitter power.
2. Call the setup screen.
Servo: → S.BUS LINK → MODE IN
Sensor: → SENSOR → REGISTER
3. Connect the S.BUS device and battery you
want to set with a 3-way hub or Y-harnesses
as shown in the Àgure.
4. Perform setting in accordance with each
screen.
5. This sets the channel and other data for each
S.BUS servo, or telemetry device to be used
with the S.BUS device or receiver.
TELEMETRY SYSTEM
The R3008SB receiver features bi-directional communication with a T-FHSS Air Futaba
transmitter using the S.BUS2 port. Using the S.BUS2 port an impressive array of telemetry
VHQVRUVPD\EHXWLOL]HG,WDOVRLQFOXGHVERWKVWDQGDUG3:0RXWSXWSRUWVDQG6%86RXWSXW
ports.
*Telemetry is available only in the T-FHSS Air mode.
7KHWHOHPHWU\IXQFWLRQUHTXLUHVWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJUHFHLYHU 56% 7KH7-ZLOOHQWHUDQGNHHSWKH,'QXPEHURIWKH56%WKDWLWLVOLQNHGWR
:KHQ\RXXVHWZRRUPRUH56%VHWWHOHPHWU\PRGHWR,1+
●Telemetry sensor (sold separately)
Info
Signal
Your aircraft's data can be checked in the
transmitter by connecting various telemetry
sensors to the S.BUS2 connector of the
receiver.
Info
Before use
7-
Power battery voltage is
displayed at the transmitter.
voltage
Receiver
6%86
&RQQHFWRU
6ZLWFK
Info
7HUPLQDOER[
Battery voltage is
displayed at the transmitter.
Info
+8%
Servos are classified by channel, but sensors
are classified by “slot” . Since the initial slot
number of the T10J is preset at each sensor,
the sensors can be used as is by connecting
them. There are 1~31 slots.
Slot 1
530
6HQVRU
Slot 2
$OWLWXGH
6HQVRU
Slot 3 〜 5
9ROWDJH
6HQVRU
Info
+8%
●Slot Number
7HPSHUDWXUH
6HQVRU
*36
6HQVRU
Slot 6 〜 7
Slot 8 〜 15
6HQVRU
Slot 16
6HQVRU
Slot 17
Info
+8%
Slot 31
37
Common function
The setting screens are called from the following menu. All the functions common to
airplane, helicopter, glider, and multi-copter model types are shown here.
● First set the throttle
to slow.
To menu screen
by holding down
the + key
● Then turn on the
power.
（Home screen）
● W hen t h e E N D k e y i s
pressed, the display
returns to the home
screen.
END
＋
Common function
（1 second） ● When the + key is pressed for
1 second, the menu screen is
displayed.
MENU
MENU
1/3
（Selection）
MENU
2/3
● Move the cursor
( h i g h l i g ht e d ) u p a n d
down and to the left and
right with the Jog key and
select the function.
The cursor can be moved
over several pages.
（Calling the setting screen）
MENU
3/3
38
● Press the Jog key to open the
setting screen.
key ／ LCD
●＋ key
●− key
●Jog key
●END key
■ Function
MENU1/3
(P.40)
TELEMETRY
(P.66)
Model select ／ Model Copy ／ Data
reset ／ RX ／ Link
Telemetry Display ／ Alarm setup
MDL-NAME
Telemetry sensor
(P.43)
Model name ／ User name
FAIL SAFE
(P.45)
Fail safe
REVERSE
(P.47)
Servo reverse
TIMER
(P.48)
SENSOR
SBUS LINK
(P.83)
(P.89)
S.BUS servo set up
MDL-TRANS
(P.92)
Data transfer of another 10J or 8J
TRAINER
Trainer
(P.93)
Common function
MDL-SEL
MENU2/3
Timer
SERVO
(P.49)
Servo monitor ／ Servo test
END POINT
(P.50)
End point
TRIM
(P.51)
Trim reset ／ Trim step
SUB TRIM
(P.52)
Sub trim
P.MIX1-6
(P.53)
Program mixing 1 〜 6
AUX-CHAN
(P.56)
AUX channel
PARAMETER
(P.58)
Data reset ／ Model type ／ ATLtrim ／ LCD contrast ／ Back light :
mode, time, adjustment ／ Home
display ／ Battery alarm ／ Battery
vibration ／ Buzzer tone ／ Jog
navi ／ Jog light ／ Jog time ／
Telemetry : mode, unit ／ Speech :
language, volume ／ Stick position
alarm
39
MDL-SEL
Model select（select ／ copy ／ reset ／ RX type ／ link）
(Common)
Function
This function is used when calling and copying
model data stored in the transmitter. The selected
model data can also be reset. System changes
(T-FHSS Air, S-FHSS) matched to the receiver type
and linking with the receiver are also done here.
Model select（SELECT）
The model data of up to 30 models can be stored in the transmitter. This function is used when
calling saved model data.
Model copy（COPY）
This is the model data copy function. It is convenient when you want to store model data as backup
or build a number of models with the same data settings.
● The data of the model memory currently in use can be copied to another model memory.
Data reset（RESET）
The model data currently in use can be reset to its initial value. However, it does not Reset other
than the following of a parameter.
[ The function reset in a parameter : ATL trim, TELEMETRY mode, STK POSI ALRM ]
Receiver selection（RX）
Common function
The R3008SB supplied with the transmitter, employs the T-FHSS Air system. When you want to use
an S-FHSS receiver, switch to S-FHSS here. However, the telemetry function cannot be used with the
S-FHSS system.
Link（LINK）
When linking with the receiver, the transmitter is set to the link mode here. The ID number of the
currently linked receiver is displayed.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
Model copy
Data reset
RX system
Link
40
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Model select
● Select the setting
item with the Jog
key.
② Select "MDL-SEL"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
（Model number：1 〜 30）
● Original data : Model type
Model name
● Copy place : Model type Model
name
● System（T-FHSS Air or S-FHSS)
● Link receiver ID
Model select
① Select the SELECT item and then
select the model number by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
② P r e s s t h e Jog key f o r 1
second.
③ Select the model by pressing the
Jog key.
（1 second）
−
or
Selection range：1 〜 30
● Confirmation message
"sure?" blinks.
● A confirmation "beep
beep" sounds to show that
selection is complete.
For safety, a double setting system is used. When a change is cancelled after the confirmation message is
displayed, the change is not made when moved to another setting item by Jog key.
Model copy
① Select the COPY item and the select
the model number of the copy
destination by pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
＋
② P r e s s t h e Jog key f o r 1
second.
（1 second）
−
or
③ Copy the model by pressing the
Jog key.
Selection range：1 〜 30
● A confirmation "beep"
s o u n d s a n d "Complete"
is displayed on the screen
to show that copying is
complete.
For safety, a double setting system is used. When a change is cancelled after the confirmation message is
displayed, the change is not made when moved to another setting item by Jog key.
Common function
● Confirmation message
"sure?" blinks.
Date reset
① Select the REST item and then press the Jog
key for 1 second.
② Date reset by pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
● Confirmation message "sure?" blinks.
● A confirmation "beep" sounds and
"Complete" is displayed on the screen is
complete.
For safety, a double setting system is used. When a change is cancelled after the confirmation message
is displayed, the change is not made when moved to another setting item by Jog key.
CAUTION
Only the throttle channel (CH3) initial setting is REV (reverse). Thoroughly
check the Hi and Low directions of the engine or motor used and be careful that
they do not suddenly run at full speed. Even after data reset, CH3 is reversed.
41
RX type
① Select the RX item and then select
T-FHSS Air or S-FHSS by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
② RX type change by pressing the
Jog key.
● Confirmation message
"sure?" blinks.
−
or
● A confirmation "beep"
sounds is complete.
Selection range：T-FHSS Air,
S-FHSS
For safety, a double setting system is used. When a change is cancelled after the confirmation message is
displayed, the change is not made when moved to another setting item by Jog key.
Link
① Select the LINK item and then press the Jog key
for 1 second.
（1 second）
Common function
● T-FHSS Air only. S-FHSS does not enter the link
mode. Use the receiver link button to link the
receiver.
② Enters the link mode for about 20 seconds.
During this time, bring the receiver near the
transmitter and turn on the receiver power.
When linking, the receiver ID is displayed.
● In the link mode, a confirmation "beep
beep beep" sounds and the time
remaining is displayed on the screen.
W h e n 20 s e c o n d s h a v e e l a p s e d , a
continuous beep sounds and the link
mode is exited.
For safety, linking must not be performed while the drive motor or engine is running. When linking is
complete, turn the power off and on and check operation.
*Link is required when a new model is made from a model selection.
42
MDL-NAME
Model name ／ User name
(Common)
Function
A model name is inputted into each model in
T10J.
User name is inputted into T10J.
Model name setting（MDL NAME）
This function assigns a name to the model data. The model name is displayed on the top row of the
home screen. This serves to prevent model memory mistakes if the current aircraft name or other
name is entered.
● Up to 10 characters can be set.
User name setting（USR NAME）
The user name displayed on the home screen can be set. (When a user name is not set, the Futaba
logo is displayed) When the home screen display is changed to USR-NAME by PARAMETER, the set
user name is displayed on the home screen.
● Up to 10 characters can be set.
Method
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "MDL-NAME"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Common function
Calling the setting screen
（Reset）
Model name
（Candidate characters）
● Characters that can be entered ;
Numeric/upper case alphabet/
lower case alphabet
User name
Model name
① Move the cursor to the model
name digit you want to change by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
② Move the cursor to the
candidate character you
want to change with the
Jog key.
③ Change the character by pressing
the Jog key.
or
Set the model name by repeating steps ① to ③ above.
Reset method：When the cursor is moved to any digit of the model name by + key or ‒ key and the
Jog key is pressed in the state in which the cursor was moved to RESET by Jog key, the model name
returns to its initial setting.
43
User name
① Move the cursor to the user name
digit you want to change by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
−
② Move the cursor to the
candidate character you
want to change with the
Jog key.
③ Change the character by pressing
the Jog key.
Set the user name by repeating steps ① to ③ above.
Reset method: When the cursor is moved to any digit of the user name by + key or ‒ key and the Jog
key is pressed in the state in which the cursor was moved to RESET by Jog key, the user name returns
to its initial setting (Futaba logo).
Displaying the user name on the home screen
The set user name can be displayed on the home screen. (When a user name is not set, the Futaba logo is
displayed.) When the home screen display is changed to USR-NAME by PARAMETER, the set user name is
displayed.
Common function
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "PARAMETER"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
② Select "USR-NAME" by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
③ End setting by pressing the
END key.
（1 second）
Parameter
① Select "HOME-DSP" from the
parameter 2 page with the Jog key.
＋
44
−
END
Fail safe
FAIL SAFE
(Common)
Function
When normal radiowaves cannot be received due
to noise and interference, the NOR mode, which
holds the servo of each channel in its position
immediately before reception was lost, or F/S (Fail
Safe) mode, which moves the servo of each channel
to a preset position, can be selected. When T-FHSS
Air is selected, the battery fail safe voltage can be
set.
ŏ:hen the throttle channel was reversed by servo
reverse function, the FS data is also reversed.
(Throttle channel only) If the receiver battery
voltage drops below the set value when the fail
safe mode was selected, the battery fail safe
function moves the servo to a preset position.
ŏThe S-FHSS fail safe voltage is 3.89.
ŏOnly the throttle channel battery fail safe function
can be turned on and off.
Method
ŏ:hen this function was performed reset the battery
fail safe function by the following method and
immediately land.
Reset method： The b attery fail s afe fu nction c a n be
temporarily disabled by moving the throttle stick to the slowest
side. However, after 30 seconds the battery fail safe function will
return to the battery fail safe state.
WARNING
For safety, always set the fail safe functions.
Ɣ5HPHPEHUWRVHWWKHWKURWWOHFKDQQHOIDLOVDIHIXQFWLRQVRWKDW
the servo moves to the maximum slow side for airplanes and
to the slow side from the hovering position for helicopters.
Crashing of the model at full high when normal radio waves
cannot be received due to interference, etc., is very dangerous.
Ɣ,IWKHEDWWHU\IDLOVDIHLVUHVHWE\WKHWKURWWOHVWLFNLWPD\
be mistaken for an engine malfunction and will be reset at
WKURWWOHVORZDQGWKHPRGHOZLOOFRQWLQXHWRÀ\,I\RXKDYH
any doubts, immediately land.
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "Fail safe"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Mode select
Common function
Calling the setting screen
F/S Position
B-F/S : ON/OFF
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
Fail safe
■ Mode selection
① Select the mode by
pressing the + key or
‒ key at the MODE
item of each channel.
＋
−
or
（Range）
NOR, F/S
（When F/S mode was selected）
■ F/S position
■ When using the B-F/S mode
② In the mode selected state, set the F/
S position by holding the stick of that
channel in the position you want to set
and press the Jog key for 1 second.
① Select ACT by pressing the + key or
‒ key at the B-F/S item.
● A confirmation beeping sounds to
show that the servo position was
set.
＋
−
or
（Range ／ Default）
INH, ACT ／ INH
45
Battery fail safe voltage setting
① Select BATTERY F/S VOLTAGE
on page 3 of the fail safe screen
with the Jog key.
② Set the voltage by
pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
（Set up range）
3.8V 4.0V 4.2V 4.4V 4.6V 4.8V
5.0V 5.3V 5.6V 5.9V 6.2V 6.5V
6.8V 7.1V 7.4V
Common function
46
③ End setting by pressing the
END key.
END
REVERSE
Servo reverse
Function
Servo reversing (REVERSE): changes the
direction an individual servo responds to a
&21752/67,&.PRWLRQ
CAUTION
(Common)
For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the
section on SWASH AFR before reversing any
servos.
With the exception of CCPM helicopters, always
complete your servo reversing prior to any other
programming.
When using ACRO functions that control
PXOWLSOHVHUYRVVXFKDV)/$3(521RU97$,/LW
may be confusing to determine whether the servo
needs to be reversed or a setting in the function
needs to be reversed. Refer to the instructions for
each specialized function for further details.
Only the throttle channel (CH3) initial setting is REV (reverse). Thoroughly check the Hi and Low directions of the
engine or motor used and be careful that they do not suddenly run at full speed.
Since the direction of the ailerons of an airplane can be easily mistaken, be very careful.
Method
Calling the setting screen
＋
② Select "REVERSE"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
To prevent erroneous setting, after the servo reverse screen was called as described above, the channel
will not be selected if the Jog key is not pressed at the left and right.
Common function
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
● The currently selected channel
is highlighted.
Channel select
● Display Reverse/Normal
REV：Reverse
NOR：Normal
● Select the channel with the
Jog key.
（Channel number）
Servo Reverse
① Channel is Select by Jog
key.
Selection range：1 〜
10ch
② NOR or REV is chosen by Jog key.
● The confirmation message "sure?"
blinks on the screen. (Not displayed
if the same as before.)
③ Reverse the servo by pressing the
Jog key.
● A c on f i r m at i on b e e p i ng
sounds and the direction of
operation is reversed.
For safety, a double setting system is used. When a change is cancelled after the confirmation message is
displayed, the change is not made when moved to another setting item by Jog key.
47
TIMER
Timer
(Common)
Function
The timer is convenient during a competition to
VHWWKHVSHFL¿HGDPRXQWRIWLPHRUWKHÀ\LQJWLPH
on a full tank of fuel.
ŏTwo timer systems can be set. Timer 1 TMR1! and
Timer 2 TMR2!
ŏThe timers can be set for each model. Since the
timers can be set to match the model, they do not
have to be reset each time the model is changed
ŏThe type of timer can be selected from among
up (UP), down (DO:N), and down stop (DN-STP).
The up timer is counted up from 0 and the elapsed
time is displayed on the screen. The down timer is
counted down from the set time and the remaining
time is displayed on the screen. The down stop
timer stops the count at 0. Each timer can be set
up to 99 minutes 59 seconds.
ŏSwitches A to H, throttle stick (ST-THR), or power
switch (P:R-S:) can be selected as the start
stop switch (ON-S:). The ONOFF direction can
also be set. However, when the power switch was
selected, the timer starts when the power switch is
turned on.
ŏ:hen the timer you want to reset is selected
with the -og key and the -og key is pressed for
1 second at the home screen, the timer is reset.
Switches A to H can be selected as the reset switch
(RS-S:). The ONOFF direction can also be set.
ŏThe updown timer audible alarm indicates the
time by a beep every second, continuous beeping
at 2 second intervals from 20 seconds before the
set time, and a continuous beeping at a 1 second
interval from 10 seconds before the set time.
Method
Common function
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "TIMER"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
● When the throttle switch is
● Select the item with the
Jog key.
Time set up
Mode selection
ON Switch selection
Switch direction
Reset Switch selection
Switch direction
（Timer1） （Timer2）
selected at switch selection,
hold the throttle stick in the
position you want to set the
ON/OFF point at ON direction
setting and set the ON/OFF
position by pressing the Jog key
for 1 second. The timer is turned
ON at points higher than this
position. The ON direction can
be switched by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
Timer ＜TMR1＞＜TMR2＞
■ Mode selection
① Select timer mode
from the "MODE"
with the ＋ or − key.
＋
−
or
（Range ／ Default）
UP, DOWN, DN-STP/UP
48
■ Timer time setting
■ Switch selection and ON direction setting
② Set the time by
pressing the + key or
‒ key at each TIME
(minutes):(second)
item.
③ Select the switch by pressing the + key or ‒ key at
the ON-SW or RS-SW item and set the ON direction by
pressing the + key or ‒ key at the ON direction setting
item.
(Switch setting range/Default)
ON-SW: SwA 〜 H, ST-THR, PWR-SW/SwA
RS-SW: SwA 〜 H/SwA
(Switch ON direction/Default)
3P SW: NULL (normally off), UP, UP&DWN, UP&CNT, CENTER,
CNT&DN, DOWN/NULL
2P SW: NULL, UP, DOWN/NULL
（Range ／ Default）
0 〜 99 m i n u t e s 59
seconds/10 minutes 00
second
Servo monitor ／ Servo test
SERVO
Function
The servo display/servo test function displays
the CH1 to CH10 servo output bar graph and tests
servo operation.
ŏThe servo display function can be used for a simple
operation check of such functions as the mixing
function.
ŏ:hen the servo test function is turned on, the servo
moves to the left and right at the set period. A
Method
(Common)
variable speed LNR (linear) mode or Àxed speed
-MP (jump) mode can be selected. This can be
used to check the servo, etc. Operation ONOFF
can also be selected for each channel.
CAUTION
Using the servo test will move the servos to
their full throw. Do not use this with linkages
installed. Using it may damage the servo and
linkage.
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "SERVO"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
● Switch the screen by selecting
TEST and operating the jog
key to the left and right.
● The servo operating position
of each channel is displayed
on a bar graph.
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
Common function
Switching to the servo test
screen
(Servo Monitor）
Screen change
● Where "GRPH" is chosen, a
Jog key is pressed in right or
left.
(Servo Test）
Servo test ON/OFF
Type Select
Cycle Select
Speed setting
Channel Select
● Operation of a servo test
Servo test
■ Type/cycle/speed setting
■ Channel selection
■ Servo test start/stop
① Select the setting item (TYPE, CYCL,
SPD) with the Jog key and set the item
by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
② Select the channel you want to
test with the Jog key and select
ACT/INH by pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
③ Select the "TEST" item
with the Jog key and
start/stop the servo test
by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
＋
−
or
（Range ／ Default）
TYPE：LNR, JMP ／ LNR
CYCL：1 〜 100 ／ 10（full speed at 1）
SPD：1 〜 100 ／ 7（full speed at 100）
＋
−
or
Selection range：ACT, INH
Default：INH
（only CH1 is ACT）
Selection range：ON, OFF
Default：OFF
49
END POINT
End point
(Common)
Function
The End Point function adjusts the left and right
servo throws, generates differential throws, and
will correct improper linkage settings.
ŏThe servo travel can be adjusted individually at
the left and right sides.
Servo throw
At 100% setting the servo throw of each channel is about 40°
for channels 1 to 4 and about 55° for channels 5 to 10.
However, the maximum servo travel for channels 5 to 10 is
about 110%.
*When channels 5 to 8 were mixed by flaperon, differential or
ailvator, the throw becomes the same (about 40° ) as channels
1 to 4.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "END POINT"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Common function
● Select the channel with
the Jog key.
● The setting rate of each
channel
（Left ／ Down） （Right ／ Up）
rate display rate display
＜ ChannelDisplay ＞
ACROBATIC
HELICOPTER
GLIDER (AF4)
MULTICOPTER
1: AIL
（Aileron） 6: FLP
（Flap）1: AIL
（Aileron） 6: PIT
（PITCH）1: AIL
（Aileron） 6: FL2（Flap2） 1: AIL
（Aileron） 6: AU6
2: ELE
（Elevator）7: AU7
2: ELE
（Elevator）7: AU7
2: ELE（Elevator）7: AL2
（Aileron2）2: ELE（Elevator）7: AU7
3: THR
（Throttle）8: AU8
3: THR
（Throttle）8: AU8
3: MOT
（Motor） 8: FL3（Flap3） 3: THR
（Throttle）8: AU8
4: RUD
（Rudder）9: AU9
4: RUD
（Rudder）9: AU9
4: RUD（Rudder）9: FL4（Flap4） 4: RUD
（Rudder）9: AU9
5: GER
（Gear） 10: AU0
5: GYR
（GYRO） 10: AU0
5: FLP（Flap）
10: AU0
5: MOD
10: AU0
End point
① A channel is chosen by Jog key.
Selection range：1 〜 10ch
② Operate the stick or knob of the selected
channel fully to the left (down) or right (up)
and adjust the rate by pressing the + key or
‒ key.
＋
or
−
Range：
0 〜 140%
Default：100%
● When you want to
return the set value
to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒
key simultaneously.
Adjust the rate of each direction of the stick and VR by repeating step ① .
50
TRIM
Trim reset ／ Trim step
(Common)
Function
Trim Reset
Trim Step
This function returns the trim of the model
memory in use to the center (initial state).
However, at this time, sub trim and trim step
amount are not reset.
Method
The amount of trim change per step can be
changed between 1 and 40 according to the aircraft
capacity and trim application.
Set it to match the application. With ordinary
aircraft, a setting of about 2 to 10 should be fine.
,QLWLDOYDOXH
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select
"TRIM"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Trim Reset
Trim step
● Select the item with the
Jog key.
Common function
● The numbers in ( ) indicate
the current trim position. (The
trim operating range is 120 〜
100[DT5,DT6]）
（Trim step rate）
Trim reset
① Select the RESET item and press the Jog key for 1 second.
（1 second）
● For example, when the step size is
the initial value (4), trim movement
from center to end is 30 steps. If the
step size is made 40, the trim moves 3
steps.
● A "beep" sounds to indicate that resetting is
complete. At this time, the trim position number
returns to 0.
Trim step
① Select the trim you want to set from the STEP item
and set the step size by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：1 〜 40
Default：4
● When you want to return the
set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
51
SUB TRIM
Sub trim
(Common)
Function
The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo
neutral position, and may be used to make fine
adjustments to the control surface after linkages
and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set
up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set to
their center position.
Setting precautions
If sub trim is too large, the servo operating range
may be exceeded at maximum control surface
angle and generate a dead band in which the servo
does not operate. First connect the linkage so that
the amount of sub trim used is held to a minimum.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "SUB TRIM"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Common function
● Select the channel with the
Jog key.
● SUB trim rate of each channel.
SUB trim rate of the selected channel.
＜ ChannelDisplay ＞
ACROBATIC
HELICOPTER
GLIDER (AF4)
MULTICOPTER
1: AIL
（Aileron） 6: FLP
（Flap）1: AIL
（Aileron） 6: PIT
（PITCH）1: AIL
（Aileron） 6: FL2
（Flap2） 1: AIL
（Aileron） 6: AU6
2: ELE
（Elevator）7: AU7
2: ELE
（Elevator）7: AU7
2: ELE（Elevator）7: AL2
（Aileron2）2: ELE（Elevator）7: AU7
3: THR
（Throttle）8: AU8
3: THR
（Throttle）8: AU8
3: MOT
（Motor） 8: FL3
（Flap3） 3: THR
（Throttle）8: AU8
4: RUD
（Rudder）9: AU9
4: RUD
（Rudder）9: AU9
4: RUD
（Rudder）9: FL4
（Flap4） 4: RUD
（Rudder）9: AU9
5: GER
（Gear） 10: AU0
5: GYR
（GYRO） 10: AU0
5: FLP
（Flap）
10: AU0
5: MOD
10: AU0
Sub trim
① A channel is chosen by Jog key.
② Select the SUB trim you want to set from
channel item and set the rate by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
Selection range：
(page 1) 1 〜 5ch
(page 2) 6 〜 10ch
52
−
or
Range：
-120 〜 +120%
Default：0%
● When you want to
return the set value
to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒
key simultaneously.
P.MIX1-6
Program mixing 1 〜 6
(Common)
Function
Mixing that can independently customize 6
functions can be used. Programmable mixing is
used to remove bad tendencies of the aircraft and
PDNH RSHUDWLRQ SOHDVDQW ,Q DGGLWLRQ WR PL[LQJ
between arbitrary channels, this function includes
linking (linking with another mix), trim addition,
offset, and switch setting functions.
P.MIX 1 〜 4 (normal type)
The following functions can be set for programmable mixing 1 to 4:
【Mixing Channel】
● Use this function by changing the channel because the master channel and slave channels initial setting is a
temporary combination.
● When OFS was selected as the master channel, the mixing rate setting applies to slave only. When a mixing
rate is set, slave servo operation is offset by that amount.
● A knob (VR) or digital trim (DT5, DT6), as well as a channel, can be selected as the master channel.
【Trim selection】
● Whether or not mixing includes master channel trim operation can be selected.
● The master channel mixing reference point can be shifted.
【Switch selection】
● The programmable mixing ON/OFF switch can be selected. The switches that can be selected are switches A to
H and the throttle stick.
● The switch operating direction can be set. When a 2 position switch was selected, up /down can be set, and
when a 3 position switch was selected, up/up and down /up / and center/center/center and down /down can
be selected. When the throttle stick was selected, the ON/OFF position and operation direction can be set.
When "NULL" is selected, mixing is always ON.
Common function
【Mixing reference point change】
P. MIX 5 〜 6（curve type）
Programmable mix 5 to 6 allows setting of the mixing rate by 5 point curve.
OFS and knob/digital trim use and trim selection by normal type master channel setting described
above are impossible, but switch selection is possible.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "P.MIX1-6"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
53
P.MIX Selection
（P.MIX 1-6）
■ Calling the setting screen
① Use the Jog key to select the P.MIX
number you want to use.
② Call the setting screen by pressing
the Jog key.
to P.MIX1 〜 4
set up screen
● P.MIX1 〜 4（normal type）
● P.MIX5 〜 6（curve type）
to P.MIX5 〜 6
set up screen
（P.MIX1 〜 4 set up screen）
Function activation
Mixing rate adjustment
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used.
When ON or OFF is selected,
the function is activated. ON
and OFF changes are linked
to the switch.
Offset
Master CH selection
Slave CH selection
● Select the item with the
Jog key.
（Master CH Current position）
Trim ON/OFF
Switch selection
Switch direction
Common function
P.MIX1 〜 4
■ Function activation
■ Master/slave channel selection
① Select the MIX item and select ON
or OFF by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
② Select the MASTR channel you want
to use by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not want to use
the function select INH.
−
or
③ Select the Slave channel you want to
us by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
● A knob VR or digital trim DT5/DT6, as well as channels 1
to 10, can be specified as the master channel. In addition,
when OFS was selected as the master channel, slave servo
operation is offset.
■ Mixing rate adjustment
④ Select the RATE item and adjust the
mixing rate by pressing the + key or ‒
key for each direction of the stick, etc.
selected at the master channel.
＋
＋
−
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value
to the initial value, press the + key and ‒
key simultaneously.
（Changing the ON/OFF Switch）
■ ON/OFF Switch selection
■ Switch ON direction setting
① Select the "SW" item and then
select the switch by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
② Select the "POSI" item and select the switch
ON direction by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
Selection range：SwA 〜
SwH、THR
54
＋
−
or
● 2P SW：NULL（always ON）,UP, DOWN
● 3P SW：NULL（always ON）, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN,
DOWN
● THR stick: Hold the stick at the ON/OFF point
and set the ON/OFF position by pressing the Jog
（1 second）
key for 1 second. (If the Jog key is pressed for 1
second when the position was set, it returns to
the NULL state.) The switch ON direction can also
be selected by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
（Changing the mixing reference point）
（Including trim operation）
■ Mixing reference point setting
■ Trim ON/OFF setting
① Select the "OFFST" item and hold
the master side stick or knob in
the position you want to set and
set the new reference point by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
＋
−
or
Range：OFF、ON
Range：-100 〜 +100%
（THR only 0 〜 100%）
Default：0%
① Select the "TRM" item
and select ON or OFF by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
Default：OFF
● When you do not want to include trim in
mixing select OFF.
CAUTION
At the end of setting, check that the mixing function is performed normally.
（P.MIX5 〜 6 set up screen）
● Select the item with the
Jog key.
5Point curve
setting
Function activation
Master CH select
Slave CH select
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used.
When ON or OFF is selected,
the function is activated. ON
and OFF changes are linked
to the switch.
Switch selection
Switch ON direction
Common function
● The set curve is displayed on a
graph.
P.MIX5 〜 6
Refer to the P.MIX1 〜 4 setting method described previously for settings other than the 5 point curve setting
described below.
■ 5point curve setting
① Select the setting item (P-1 〜 P-5) of each point with the Jog key and set the amount of
movement of each point by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
CAUTION
At the end of setting, check that the mixing function is performed normally.
55
AUX-CHAN
AUX Channel
(Common)
Function
Auxiliary channel function (AUX-CH): defines
the relationship between the transmitter controls
and the receiver output for channels 5-10.
Remember that if you assign primary control of
a channel to a switch which you later use for other
functions (like dual/triple rates or airbrakes), every
time you use that other function you will also be
moving the auxiliary channel.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "AUX-CHAN"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Common function
＜ AUX Channel Default ＞
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
ACROBATIC
SwG
（SwitchG）
VR
（Volume）
DT5
（Trim5）
DT6
（Trim6）
SwA(SwitchA)
SwD(SwitchD)
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
HELICOPTER
SwF（SwitchF）
----（PITCH）
SwC（SwitchC）
VR（Volume）
SwA(SwitchA)
SwD(SwitchD)
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
GLIDER
DT5（Trim5）
SwG（SwitchG）
SwD(SwitchD)
DT6（Trim6）
SwA(SwitchA)
VR
（Volume）
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
AUX Channel
① A channel is chosen by Jog key.
② Select the "SW" item and then select the switch
by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
Selection range：5 〜 10ch
−
or
Selection range：NULL, SwA 〜 SwH,
VR, DT5, DT6
56
MULTICOPTER
SwE（SwitchE）
SwC（SwitchC）
VR（Volume）
DT6（Trim6）
SwA(SwitchA)
SwD(SwitchD)
WARNING
The priority of AUX
Don't assign two or more functions to one channel.
Priority may be given to a higher rank function and
a low rank function may be canceled.
higher rank
GYRO
CH5 PITCH
CH6 FLAP TRIM
CH7 AIL DIFF
ACRO
Priority
SW-G
FLAPERON
GYRO
CH8 AILVATOR
PITCH
low rank
VR
DT5
THR → NEEDLE
GYRO DT6
CH9 SW-A
CH10 SW-D
CH5 GYRO
SW-F
CH6 PITCH
CH8 ELE2
THR → NEEDLE
GYRO
SW-C
GOVERNOR
SW-A
CH9 GOVERNOR
CH10 SW-D
GLIDER
CH5
FLAP1
CH6
FLAP2
CH7
AILERON2
GYRO
SW-D
CH8
FLAP3
GYRO
DT6
CH9
FLAP4
CH10 CAMBR MIX
CH5
GYRO
GYRO
DT5
SW-G
VR
Common function
GOVERNOR
CH7 GYRO
HELI
SW-A
VR
SW-E
CH6 SW-C
MULTICOPTER
CH7
GYRO
VR
CH8
GYRO
DT6
CH9 SW-A
CH10 SW-D
57
Parameter function
(Common)
PARAMETER submenu: sets those parameters
you would likely set once, and then not disturb
again.
Once you have selected the correct model you
wish to work with, the next step is setting up the
SURSHUSDUDPHWHUVIRUWKLVVSHFL¿FPRGHO
PARAMETER
Function
Data reset（RESET）
The present model data is reset. Data Reset does NOT reset, ATL Trim, TELEMETRY mode, or STK POSI
Alarm.
Model type（TYPE） SWASH : Only helicopter
WING : Only glider
MODEL TYPE: sets the type of programming used for this model.
The T10J has 30 model memories, which can each support:
● One powered aircraft (ACRO) memory type (with multiple wing and tail configurations. See twin
aileron servos, twin elevator servos, ELEVON, and V-TAIL for further information.)
● Eight helicopter swashplate types, including CCPM. See Helicopter MODEL TYPE for details.
● If you use CGY750, the swash type should choose H-1. ( Swash type is chosen by setup in CGY750. ）
● Five glider wing types. See glider WING TYPE for details.
● Multicopter type.
Common function
Before doing anything else to set up your aircraft, first you must decide which MODEL TYPE best fits
this particular aircraft. (Each model memory may be set to a different model type.) If your transmitter
is a T10JA, the default is ACRO. If it is a T10JH, the default is HELI(H1).
ATL Trim（ATL）
Adjustable travel limit (ATL): makes the channel 3 TRIM LEVER (THROTTLE TRIM) effective only at
low throttle, disabling the trim at high throttle. This prevents pushrod jamming due to idling trim
changes. This function defaults to ON. If you are not using channel 3 for throttle, you may want
trim operation the same as on all other channels. To do so, set ATL to OFF. If you need the ATL to be
effective at the top of the stick instead of the bottom, reverse the THR-REV setting. Note that this
affects all models in the radio, not just the model you are currently editing.
LCD contrast（CONTRAST）
Contrast adjustment LCD screen.
● You adjust to legible contrast. set up range -10 〜 +10
Back light（BACK-LIT）
Back light mode of a LCD screen can be chosen.
● ALWAYS / KEY-ON (Shines for a definite period of time after key operation.) / OFF
Light time（LIT-TIME）
Sets the length of time the backlight will stay on.
● Set up range 1 〜 30
Light adjustment（LIT-ADJS）
Light volume adjustment of a back light.
● Set up range 1 〜 30
Home display（HOME-DSP）
Item selection displayed on a home screen
● Futaba logo (Default), USR-NAME , RX BATT, DT5/DT6, THR/PIT (Case of helicopter, the position of a
throttle and pitch.)
58
Battery alarm（BATT-ALM）
Select the battery alarm voltage according to the battery to be used.
● 4 dry cell batteries ⇒ 4.2V DRY4
● HT5F1800B (NiMH battery) ⇒ 5.0V NiMH5
● FT2F2100B (Lithium ferrite battery) ⇒ 5.8V LiFe2
Battery alarm vibration（BATT VIB）
Battery alarm is told with vibration.
Buzzer tone（BUZ-TONE）
The tone of buzzer sound when a key is pressed.
● Set up range : OFF,1(low) 〜 100(high)
Jog key navigation（Jog-NAVI）
Blink at the time of Jog key operation, Display of the operation direction.
Jog light（Jog-LIT）
ON/OFF of a Jog key light.
Jog light time（Jog-TIME）
Time setting in which a Jog key light shines.
● Set up range : 1 〜 30(s)
Telemetry mode setting（TELEMETRY MODE）
● Range：ACT / INH
Telemetry display units setting（TELEMETRY UNIT）
Sets whether the telemetry display is in meters or yards/pounds.
● Range：METER / YARD
（℃ / ℉）
Speech language setting（SPEECH LANGUAGE）
Sets the speech language when listening to telemetry information through earphones.
● Range：Japanese (JPN), English (English)
Common function
Sets whether or not telemetry is activated. When using 2 receivers with 1 transmitter, select INH.
Speech volume setting（SPEECH VOLUME）
Sets the volume when listening to telemetry information through earphones.
● Range：LOW / HIGH
Stick position alarm setting（STK POSI ALRM）
Can be set so that an audible alarm sounds once when the throttle stick reaches the set position.
59
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "PARAMETER"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Data reset
Model type
page 1
Swash type
Wing type
ATLTrim
(In the case of a helicopter )
(In the case of a glider )
● Next page 2 〜 5
Common function
LCD contrast（CONTRAST）
Back light（BACK-LIT）
Light time（LIT-TIME）
Light adjustment（LIT-ADJS）
Home display（HOME-DSP）
Battery alarm（BATT ALM）
Battery alarm vibration（BATT VIB）
Buzzer tone（BUZ-TONE）
Jog key navigation（JOG-NAVI）
Jog light（JOG-LIT）
Jog light time（JOG-TIME）
（TELEMETRY MODE）
（TELEMETRY UNIT）
（SPEECH LANGUAGE）
（SPEECH VOLUME）
Stick position alarm（STK POSI ALRM）
page 2
page 3
page 4
page 5
Date reset
① Call the "RESET" from the PARAMETER by Press
the Jog key for 1 second.
② Date reset by pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
● Confirmation message "sure?" blinks.
● A confirmation "beep" sounds and
"Complete" is displayed on the screen is
complete.
For safety, a double setting system is used. You need to confirm your setting changes by pressing the
jog key. When "Complete" can be seen, it is the completion of reset.
CAUTION
60
Only the throttle channel (CH3) initial setting is REV (reverse). Thoroughly check the Hi and Low directions
of the engine or motor used and be careful that they do not suddenly run at full speed. Even after data reset,
CH3 is reversed.
Model type
① Select the "TYPE" item and
then select the model type by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
② Press the Jog key for 1 second.
③ Model type change by pressing
the Jog key.
（1 second）
−
or
● Confirmation message
"sure?" blinks.
● The new model type is
displayed on the screen.
For safety, a double setting system is used. You need to confirm your
setting changes by pressing the jog key. If you fail to press the jog key
and see "Complete" on your screen, your changed are not saved.
● A confirmation "beep"
sounds is complete.
Selection range：
ACROBATIC,
HELICOPTER,GLIDER,MULTI
COPT
Swash type（for Heli）
① Select the "SWASH" item and
then select the swash type by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
（1 second）
● C o n f i r m a t i on messag e
"sure?" blinks.
or
③ Swash type change by pressing
the Jog key.
For safety, a double setting system is used. You need to confirm your
setting changes by pressing the jog key. If you fail to press the jog key
and see "Complete" on your screen, your changed are not saved.
● A confirmation "beep"
sounds is complete.
Selection range：H-1, HR3,
H-3, HE3, HN3, H-2, H-4, H4X
Wing type（for Glider）
① Select the "WING" item and
then select the swash type by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
② Press the Jog key for 1 second.
③ Swash type change by pressing
the Jog key.
（1 second）
● C o n f i r m a t i on messag e
"sure?" blinks.
or
Common function
＋
② Press the Jog key for 1 second.
For safety, a double setting system is used. When a change is cancelled
after the confirmation message is displayed, the change is not made
when moved to another setting item by Jog key.
● A confirmation "beep"
sounds is complete.
Selection range：1AIL, 2AIL,
2A+1F, 2A+2F, 2A+4F
ATL Trim ON/OFF
① Select the "ATL" item and change the mode by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Selection range：ON, OFF
Default：OFF
61
LCD contrast
① Select the "CONTRAST" item and change numerical
value (contrast) by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
Selection range：-10 〜
+10
−
or
Default：0
Back-light ／ Light-time ／ Light-adjustment
■ Back-light mode
■ Light-time
Select the "BACK-LIT" item and
change the mode by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
＋
−
■ Light-adjustment
Select the "LIT-TIME" item and
change numerical value (time) by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
−
Select the "LIT-ADJ" item
and change numerical value
(brightness) by pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
＋
or
−
or
Common function
● "ALWAYS"：always ON
"OFF"：always OFF
"KEY-ON"：It light on after
Key operation.
● It is only a case in "KEY-ON"
mode here.
Selection range：
ALWAYS, OFF, KEY-ON
Selection range：1 〜 30(s)
Default：10(s)
Selection range：1 〜 30
Default：15
Default：ALWAYS
● When you want to return the set
value to the initial value, press the
+ key and ‒ key simultaneously.
● When you want to return the set
value to the initial value, press the
+ key and ‒ key simultaneously.
● It is the brightest at 30.
Home display
① Select the "HOME-DSP" item and change the mode
by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
● "Futaba"：Display about a Futaba logo.
"USR-NAME"：Display about a user name.
"DT5/DT6"：Display about the position of DT5
and DT6
"RX BATT"：Display about the receiver battery
voltage
"THR/PIT"：Display about the position of pitch
and throttle.
Selection range：
Futaba, USR-NAME,DT5/
DT6, RX BATT, THR/PIT(*)
Default：Futaba
*Only Heli mode can be chosen
about THR/PIT.
Battery alarm voltage
① Select the "BATT ALM" item and change the
numerical value (voltage) by pressing the + key or
‒ key.
＋
−
or
*The voltage drop of a rechargeable battery
and a dry cell battery is different. When
using a rechargeable battery, always
change the voltage.
Selection range：
4.2V 4.6V 5.0V 5.4V 5.8V
6.2V 6.6V 7.0V 7.4V
● AA alkaline batterys ⇒ 4.2V DRY4
● Futaba HT5F1800B ⇒ 5.0V NiMH5
● Futaba FT2F2100B ⇒ 5.8V LiFe2
62
*The flight should be stopped and charged
before 0.2 V before the alarm is activated.
Battery alarm voltage vibration
① Select the "BATT VIB" item and change the ON or
OFF by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Selection range：
ON, OFF
● ON ⇒ The battery alarm of a transmitter is told with
vibration.
Buzzer tone
① Select the "BUZ-TONE" item and change the
numerical value (tone) by pressing the + key or ‒
key. The higher the numerical value the higher the
tone.
＋
or
−
Selection range：
OFF, 1 〜 100
● When you want to return the
set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
① Select the "Jog-NAVI" item and change the mode
by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Selection range：
ON,OFF
Common function
Jog key navigation
When NAVI selected
flashes when the Jog key was pressed.
When a function that
only operates in the
vertical direction is
selected, the LED
blinks vertically.
When a function
that operates in
the vertical and
horizontal directions
is selected, the LED
blinks vertically and
horizontally.
Jog light
① Select the "Jog-LIT" item and change the mode by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● "ALWAYS"：The light is always switched on.
"KEY-ON"：KEY operation → Light on.
"OFF"：Always off.
Selection range：
ALWAYS, KEY-ON, OFF
Default：KEY-ON
63
Jog light time
① Select the "Jog-TIME" item and change numerical
value (time) by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Selection range：
1 〜 30
Default：10
● Jog-Lit sets the lighting time when KEY-ON
was set.
● When you want to return the
set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
Telemetry mode
① Select the "TELEMETRY-MODE" item and change
the mode by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Selection range：
ACT, INH
Common function
Telemetry unit
① Select the "TELEMETRY-UNIT" item and change the
mode by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
−
Selection range：
METER, YARD
Speech language
① Select the "SPEECH-LANGUAGE" item and change
the language by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Selection range：
Japanese, English
Speech volume
① Select the "SPEECH-VOLUME" item and change the
volume by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
64
Selection range：
HIGH, LOW
Stick position alarm
An alarm (single beep) can be sounded at the specified throttle stick position.
● Alarm function ON/OFF can be set by switch.
Beep sounds
When the THR stick
is set to the
specified position.
Select "Parameter"
Press the Jog key to the side and select page 5.
● Select the item with the
Jog key.
（STK POSI ALRM ）
Parameter setting is not
reset. However, STK
POSI ALRM, Telemetry
mode and the ATL
trim on which (MDL)
was displayed are
resettable.
●The number in parenthesis
is the current throttle stick
position.
② Set the throttle stick to the
position at which you want to
generate the alarm.
③ When the Jog key is held
down the alarm sounds at
that position.
Common function
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used.
When ON or OFF is selected,
the function is activated. ON
and OFF changes are linked
to the switch.
INH ⇔ ON/OFF
Switch selsction
Switch direction
Stick position
① Stick position is chosen by Jog
key.
●
Memorize the position at
which the beep is to sound.
THR Stick
65
TELEMETRY
Telemetry
(Common)
Function
This screen displays and sets the various information from the receiver. An alarm and vibration can be
generated depending on the information. For example, a drop in the voltage of the receiver battery housed
in the aircraft can be reported by an alarm.
● This function can only be used in the T-FHSS Air mode. The S-FHSS system cannot use telemetry.
● Telemetry sensors sold separately can be mounted in the aircraft to display a variety of information. (Receiver voltage
does not require a sensor.)
● The telemetry function cannot be used if the telemetry mode of the parameters is not ACT.
● When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry function cannot be used.
Common function
Viewing the receiver voltage.
Setting is unnecessary. When menu telemetry is
listened to, the voltage appears.
P.66
Viewing the drive battery
voltage.
CA-RVIN-700 and wiring work are necessary.
P.70
Using various optional
telemetry sensors.
Optional telemetry sensors are necessary. T10J
setting is unnecessary.
Using several telemetry
sensors of the same type.
Setting by "sensor" in the menu is necessary.
(Slot setting is necessary.)
Setting alarms from the
telemetry information.
Setting by "Telemetry" in the menu is necessary.
P.74 〜 82
P.84
P.75 〜 82
RX-BATT
● Viewing the receiver voltage.
In the initial state, the receiver voltage is displayed at the transmitter.
Display
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "TELEMETRY"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
● How to display receiver voltage
on a home screen.
Receiver voltage display
PARAMETER
HOME-DSP
"RX BATT" is chosen by ＋ key or − key.
66
● Viewing the receiver voltage maximum and minimum values.
In the initial state, the receiver voltage maximum and minimum values are displayed in the
transmitter. (Value until reset)
Display
Calling the setting screen
① Select "RX-BATT" from the telemetry
screen with the Jog key.
② Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
Receiver voltage display
Receiver voltage MIN
Receiver voltage MAX
① Select "MIN/MAX" from the RX-BATT
screen with the Jog key.
② Date reset by pressing the
Jog key for 1 second.
Common function
MIN/MAX reset
● A confirmation "beep"
sounds when complete.
ŏ Receiver → Transmitter.
The reception of the
signal from the receiver to
the transmitter is shown.
This does not affect Áight.
WARNING
Do not stare at or set the transmitter setting screen while Àying.
ŶLosing sight of the aircraft during Àight is very dangerous.
ŶWhen you want to check the information during Àight, call the telemetry screen before Àight and have the screen
checked by someone other than the operator.
67
● Setting receiver voltage alarm.
Use this setting to sound an alarm when the receiver battery voltage drops dangerously low. VIB
(vibration) that vibrates the transmitter at the same time can also be set.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Select "RX-BATT" from the telemetry
screen with the Jog key.
② Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
Common function
DN (down) shows than an
alarm is generated when
the voltage drops below
the set voltage.
Alarm set
① In the RX-BATT screen state, select
(ALARM) from the menu with the
Jog key.
② Select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
−
Vibration set
① In the RX-BATT screen state, select
(VIB) from the menu with the Jog
key.
② Select the "TYP1 〜 TYP3" by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
"VIB" types
TYP 1
＋
or
−
TYP 2
TYP 3
Alarm voltage set
① In the RX-BATT screen state, select
(LIMIT) 0.0V from the menu with
the Jog key.
② Select the voltage by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
Selection range：
3.5V 〜 8.4V
＋
or
−
● When you want to set 5.0V, press the
+ key and ‒ key simultaneously.
68
● Listening to the receiver voltage by speech.
The receiver voltage can be heard verbally from the transmitter with a commercial earphone (3.5 φ
plug). The speech function can be turned on and off with the specified switch.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Select "RX-BATT" from the telemetry
screen with the Jog key.
② Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
Selects the switch
that turns the speech
function on and off.
Speech
① In the RX-BATT screen state, select
(SPEECH) from the menu with the
Jog key.
② Select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
−
Common function
Speech
ACT / INH
Switch
① In the RX-BATT screen state, select
(SW) from the menu with the Jog
key.
② Select the switch by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
Selection range：
NULL, SWA 〜 SWH
−
OFF
In "NULL", a speech always turns on.
OFF
OFF
ON
2 Position
ON
3 Position
69
EXT-VOLT
When connected as shown in the figure, the voltage of the drive battery in the aircraft and another
power supply battery can be displayed at the T10J.
● CA-RVIN-700 (external voltage input connector sold separately) is necessary.
● Soldered wiring work is necessary.
([WUD9ROWDJH
3RUW
56%
)XVH
%ODFNOLQH
5HGOLQH
&$59,1
ZLWKH[WHUQDOSRZHU
LQSXWPXVWEHOHVVWKDQ9
Common function
3RZHU%DWWHU\RU
DQRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\
IRUVHUYRV
%UDQFK
7R0RWRU&RQWUROOHU
RU6HUYR
● EXT-Voltage display
When connected as shown in the figure, the drive battery voltage is displayed at the transmitter.
Display
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
（1 second）
EXT-Voltage display
70
② Select "TELEMETRY"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
● EXT-Voltage MIN/MAX
In the initial state, the EXT-voltage maximum and minimum values are displayed at the transmitter.
(Value until reset)
Calling the setting screen
① S e l e c t "EX T- V OLT " f r o m t h e
telemetry screen with the Jog key.
② Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
EXT-Voltage display
EXT-Voltage MAX
EXT-Voltage MIN
① In the EXT-VOLT screen state, select
(MIN/MAX) from the menu with the
Jog key.
② Date reset by pressing the
Jog key for 1 second.
Common function
MIN/MAX reset
● A confirmation "beep"
sounds is complete.
71
● EXT-Voltage alarm set up
This setting will sound an alarm when the EXT-voltage drops dangerously low. VIB (vibration) that
vibrates the transmitter at the same time can also be set.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Select "EXT-VOLT" from the
telemetry screen with the Jog key.
② Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
Common function
DN (down) shows than an
alarm is generated when
the voltage drops below
the set voltage.
Alarm set
① In the EXT-VOLT screen state, select
(ALARM) from the menu with the
Jog key.
② Select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
−
Vibration set
① In the EXT-VOLT screen state, select
(VIB) from the menu with the Jog
key.
② Select the "TYP1 〜 TYP3" by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
−
"VIB" types
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
Alarm voltage set
① In the EXT-VOLT screen state, select
(LIMIT) from the menu with the Jog
key.
② Select the voltage by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
Selection range：
0.0V 〜 70.0V
＋
or
−
● When you want to set 5.0V, press the
+ key and ‒ key simultaneously.
72
● Listening to the EXT-voltage by speech.
The EXT- voltage can be heard verbally from the transmitter with a commercial earphone (3.5mm
plug). The speech function can be turned on and off with the specified switch.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① S e l e c t " E X T - V O LT " f r o m t h e
telemetry screen with the Jog key.
② Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
Speech ON/OFF Switch
selection
Speech
① In the EXT-VOLT screen state, select
(SPEECH) from the menu with the
Jog key.
② Select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
−
Common function
Speech
ACT / INH
Switch set
① In the EXT-VOLT screen state, select
(SW) from the menu with the Jog
key.
② Select the switch by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
or
Selection range：
NULL, SWA 〜 SWH
−
OFF
In "NULL", a speech always turns on.
OFF
OFF
ON
2 Position
ON
3 Position
73
Various telemetry sensors (optional) information display and alarm setting
Various telemetry sensors (sold separately) are connectable to the S.BUS2 port of the R3008SB through
a 3-way hub and relay terminals. The information of sensors connected at initialization can be viewed as
long as 2 or more of the same kind of sensor are not used (for example, 2 temperature sensors).
● Sensors that can be used with the T10J: Futaba SBS-01T, SBS-01RM, SBS-01RO, SBS-01A, SBS-01V, SBS-01G
● Robbe sensors that can be used with the T10J: Robbe TEMP125, GPS-1675, VARIO-1712, VARIO-1672, CURR-1678
*Futaba does not sell Robbe sensor.
Sensor Connection
7(036HQVRU
6%67
530‫ق‬PDJQHW‫ك‬6HQVRU
6%650
+8%
6%86
&RQQHFWRU
530‫ق‬RSWLFV‫ك‬6HQVRU
6%652
+8%
$OWLWXGH6HQVRU
6%6$
Common function
9ROWDJH6HQVRU
6%69
Method
*366HQVRU
6%6*
+8%
5HIHUWRWKHPDQXDORIHDFKVHQVRUIRUWKH
PRXQWLQJLQVWUXFWLRQWRWKHPRGHORIVHQVRU
Sensor information can be viewed by calling telemetry from the menu and calling the connected
sensor display page. The detailed setting screen of that sensor can be called by selecting and
pressing the sensor you want to select with the Jog key.
● Refer to the receiver battery (RX-BATT) item for a description of key operation.
① Select "TELEMETRY" from the
menu with the Jog key.
② The sensor item of your choice
is chosen by Jog key, and Jog
key is pressed.
Sensor set up
74
TEMP : Display of SBS-01T(Option), and alarm setup
*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
● Conversion of a display unit is performed by "TELEMETRY
UNIT" of "PARAMETER".
TEMP is a screen which displays/sets up
the temperature information from an optional
temperature sensor.
The temperature of the model (engine, motor,
EDWWHU\HWF ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHGLVSOD\HG
,ILWEHFRPHVKLJKHURUORZHUWKDQWKHVHWWLQJDQ
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
ŏ Select >TEMP@ in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by press the -og
ŏ The maximum and the minimum
key.
ŏ Temperature
when powering ON are shown.
ŏ Maximum and minimum date reset
ŏ "UP" will show that an
alarm will start when
the temperature rises
above the set value.
"VIB" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
ŏ Switch selection
ŏYou can hear the
temperature through an
earphone or headset, by
activating the Speech
function.
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2 Position
Common function
ŏ "DN" will show that an
alarm will start when
the temperature
drops below the set
value.
by pressing the Jog key for 1 second.
3 Position
Alert set : Hot warning
Alert set : Low-temperature warning
1. Move the cursor to the UP:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT)>value@item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 100℃
Adjustment range: -20℃ a200℃
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
1. Move the cursor to the DN:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the DN:(LIMIT)>value@item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 0℃
Adjustment range: -20℃ a200℃
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
75
R.P.M : Display of SBS-01RM/RO(Option), and alarm setup
*A RPM sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
RPM is a screen which displays / sets up the
RPM information from an optional RPM sensor.
The RPM of the model (engine, motor, etc.)
ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHVKRZQ
,ILWEHFRPHVKLJKHURUORZHUWKDQWKHVHWWLQJDQ
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
ŏSelect >RPM@ in the TELEMETRY screen
and access the setup screen shown
below by press the -og key.
ŏThe maximum when
powering ON are shown.
ŏ M a x i m u m dat e r e s e t b y
ŏ RPM
pressing the Jog key for 1
second.
ŏUP: Indicates that the
alarm will start when
the RPM rises above
the set value.
Common function
ŏDN: Indicates that the
alarm will start when
the RPM falls below
the set value.
ŏYou can hear the
RPM data through an
earphone or headset,
by Activating the Speech
function.
"VIB" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
ŏ"MAG.(MAGNETIC)" or "OPT.
(OPTICAL)" is set according
to the sensor you use.
ŏIn "OPTICAL", the number of
blades("FIN") of the propeller ( r o
t o r ) your model is entered.
SBS-01RM : MAGNETIC
SBS-01RO : OPTICAL
ŏIn "MAGNETIC", the gear ratio
of your engine (motor) you are
using is entered.
ŏ Switch selection
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2 Position
3 Position
Alert set : Over rotations
Alert set : Under rotations
1. Move the cursor to the UP:ALERT item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT) >value@item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 2000rpm
Adjustment range: 0rpma390,000rpm
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
1. Move the cursor to the DN:ALERT item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT) >value@item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 0rpm
Adjustment range: 0rpma390,000rpm
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
76
ON
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
ALTITUDE : Display of SBS-01A / SBS-01G(Option), and alarm setup
*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
$/7,78'(LVDVFUHHQZKLFKGLVSOD\VVHWVXS
the altitude information from an optional altitude
sensor or GPS sensor. The altitude of the model
ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHNQRZQ,ILWEHFRPHVKLJKHU
(low) than preset altitude, you can be told by alarm.
To show warning by vibration can also be chosen.
Data when a power supply is turned on shall be 0
m, and it displays the altitude which changed from
there. Even if the altitude of an airfield is high,
that shall be 0 m and the altitude difference from
DQDLU¿HOGLVGLVSOD\HG7KLVVHQVRUFDOFXODWHVWKH
altitude from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric
pressure will get lower as you go up in altitude,
using this the sensor will estimate the altitude.
Please understand that an exact advanced display
cannot be performed if atmospheric pressure
changes in a weather situation.
● Conversion of a display unit is performed by "TELEMETRY
UNIT" of "PARAMETER".
ŏThe maximum and the minimum
when powering ON are shown.
ŏ Maximum and minimum date reset
by pressing the Jog key for 1 second.
ŏSelect >ALTITUDE@ in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by press the -og key.
ŏAltitude
ŏ"UP"indicates the
alarm will start when
the altitude reaches
above your set value.
ŏYou can hear the
Altitude data through an
earphone or headset,
by Activating the Speech
function.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
ŏSwitch selection
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2 Position
3 Position
First, the set of a reference is required.
Alert set : Low side
1. The model and transmitter to which the
altitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Move the cursor to the >REFERENCE@ of "E;EC"
item.
3. Press the -og key (1s or more press).
1. Move the cursor to the DN:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT)>value@ item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: -50(m)
Adjustment range: -500a5000(m)
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather also
DWWKHVDPHDLU¿HOG<RXVKRXOGSUHVHWEHIRUHDÀLJKW
Alert set : High side
1. Move the cursor to the UP:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT)>value@ item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 200(m)
Adjustment range: -500a5000(m)
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
Common function
ŏ"DN" indicates the
alarm will start when
the altitude reaches
below your set value.
"VIB" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
77
VARIO : Display of SBS-01A / SBS-01G(Option), and alarm setup
*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
9$5,2LVDVFUHHQZKLFKGLVSOD\VVHWVXSWKH
variometer information from an optional altitude
sensor or GPS sensor.
7KHYDULRPHWHURIWKHPRGHOZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQ
be known.
,ILWEHFRPHVKLJKHURUORZHUWKDQWKHVHWWLQJDQ
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
● Conversion of a display unit is performed by "TELEMETRY
UNIT" of "PARAMETER".
ŏSelect >9ARIO@ in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by press the -og key.
ŏ9ariometer
ŏThe maximum and the minimum
when powering ON are shown.
ŏ Maximum and minimum date reset by
pressing the Jog key for 1 second.
ŏ"UP"indicates the alarm
will start when the
vario reaches above
your set value.
Common function
78
ŏ"DN" indicates the
alarm will start when
the vario reaches
below your set value.
ŏYou can hear the
9ario data through an
earphone or headset,
by Activating the Speech
function.
"VIB" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
ŏ Switch selection
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2 Position
3 Position
Alert set : Rise side
Alert set : Low side
1. Move the cursor to the UP:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT)>value@item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 50(ms)
Adjustment range: -150a150(ms)
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
1. Move the cursor to the DN:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT)>value@item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: -50(ms)
Adjustment range: -150a150(ms)
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
DISTANCE : Display of SBS-01G(Option), and alarm setup
*An GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
The Distance screen displays and sets altitude
data from an SBS-01G GPS Sensor (sold
separately), and allows the distance to the airborne
aircraft to be read by the transmitter. When the
aircraft flies inside or outside the set distance an
alarm and vibration alerts the pilot.
*Positioning time of GPS
A short time is required until the positioning of the GPS
is established. In the meantime, don't move the model
during this process. Wait until the GPS sensor's LED turns
solid green. If it is blinking green it is still acquiring the
satellites signals.
● Conversion of a display unit is performed by "TELEMETRY
UNIT" of "PARAMETER".
ŏThis indicates the receiving accuracy from a GPS satellite. :hen
three bars are displayed, the GPS is ready for use. Pushing
>REFERENCE@ sets the current aircraft position as the starting point.
ŏCurrent distance
ŏThis indicates Maximum
Distance the aircraft Áew to.
ŏMaximum date reset by
pressing the Jog key for 1
second.
ŏSelect >DISTANCE@ in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by press the -og key.
ŏThe UP: an alarm is
generated when
the set value is
exceeded.
"VIB" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
ŏSwitch selection
ŏYou can hear the
Distance data through
an earphone or headset,
by Activating the Speech
function.
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2 Position
3 Position
Setting the reference position
Setting a "too close" alert distance.
1. Turn on the transmitter and the model with
the GPS sensor installed in it.
2. :ait for the GPS accuracy indicator to
display three bars.
3. Move the cursor to REFERENCE >E;EC@ and
press the -og key(1s or more press). The
models current position is now stored and the
distance is set to 0 m.
1. Move the cursor to the DN:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT)>value@item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 0(m)
Adjustment range: 0a5000(m)
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
*Now, the position of the present model was set to 0 m.
Setting a "too far" alert distance
1. Move the cursor to the UP:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT)>value@item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 200(m)
Adjustment range: 0a5000(m)
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
Common function
ŏThe DN: an alarm is
generated when the
distance drops below
the set value.
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
79
● 2nd page of [DISTANCE]
ŏSelect >DISTANCE@ in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by press the -og key.
ŏ-og key press a side made 2 page.
ŏCurrent position display.
N: North latitude, E: East longitude
S: South latitude, :: :est longitude
Common function
ŏAltitude calculated
as either straight line
distance (slant) or surface
distance on a map can
also be selected.
T
N
SLA
Altitude
SURFACE
Two distance calculation methods are available
Surface (straight line distance), and Slant may
be selected.
1. Select page 2 by -og key press side from the
"DISTANCE" screen.
2. Select SLANT! SURFACE! next to "MODE"
press the - key.
80
SPEED : Display of SBS-01G(Option), and alarm setup
*An GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
The speed screen displays and sets the speed data
and with a tail wind, the displayed speed increases.
from an SBS-01G (GPS sensor) sold separately.
● Conversion of a display unit is performed by "TELEMETRY
UNIT" of "PARAMETER".
The speed of the aircraft during flight can be
displayed.
*Positioning time of GPS
After flight, the maximum speed during flight
A short time is required until the positioning of the GPS
can be viewed. Because this speed is based on
is established. In the meantime, don't move the model
position data from a GPS satellite, the ground speed
during this process. Wait until the GPS sensor's LED turns
is displayed instead of air speed. Consequently,
solid green. If it is blinking green it is still acquiring the
satellites signals.
with a head wind, the displayed speed decreases
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
ŏThe DN:that an alarm
is generated when
the speed drops
below the set value.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
ŏSwitch selection
ŏYou can hear the
Speed data through an
earphone or headset, by
Activating the Speech
function.
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2 Position
3 Position
Alert setting when speed increases
Alert setting when speed decreases
1. Move the cursor to the UP:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT)>value@item .
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 200(kmh)
Adjustment range: 0a500(kmh)
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
1. Move the cursor to the DN:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the UP:(LIMIT)>value@item .
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 0(kmh)
Adjustment range: 0a500(kmh)
(UP:(LIMIT) ≧ DN:(LIMIT))
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
*This alarm is started once a model becomes more than setting
speed.
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
Common function
ŏThis indicates the receiving accuracy from a GPS satellite. :hen
three bars are displayed, the GPS is ready for use. Speed is not
displayed when receiving accuracy is bad.
ŏCurrent speed
ŏSelect >SPEED@ in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
ŏThis indicates Maximum speed the
setup screen shown below by press the -og key.
aircraft Áew to.
ŏMaximum date reset by pressing
ŏThe UP:that an alarm
the Jog key for 1 second.
is generated when
the set value is
"VIB" type
exceeded.
If the following types are selected, the
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
*Speed alarm precaution
Since the GPS speed sensor displays the ground speed, it cannot be used as a stall alarm. For
example, an aircraft that stalls at 50km/h will stall if the tailwind is 5km/h or greater even through
55km/h is displayed by ground speed. In addition, with an aircraft that will disintegrate in
midflight at 400km/h at an over-speed alarm, when the headwind reaches 30km/h the airplane will
disintegrate in midair due to over speeding even at a ground speed of 370km/h.
81
BATTERY / EXT-VOLT: Display of SBS-01V(Option), and alarm setup
*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
,QWKLVVFUHHQWKHEDWWHU\YROWDJHLVGLVSOD\HG
,Q RUGHU WR XVH WKLV IXQFWLRQ LW LV QHFHVVDU\ WR
connect of R3008SB ⇔ SBS-01V ⇔ Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The drive
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3P
lines is displayed here.
ŏSelect >BATTERY@ in the TELEMETRY screen and
access the setup screen shown below by press the
-og key.
ŏBattery voltage
ŏThe maximum and the minimum
when powering ON are shown.
ŏ Maximum and minimum date reset
by pressing the Jog key for 1 second.
"VIB" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
ŏ"DN" will show that an
alarm will start when
the E;T-9OLT drops
below the set value.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
ŏSwitch selection
Common function
ŏYou can hear the Battery
data through an earphone
or headset, by Activating the
Speech function.
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2 Position
3 Position
ŏSelect >E;T-9OLT@ in the TELEMETRY screen and ŏE;T voltage
access the setup screen shown below by press the
ŏThe maximum and the minimum
-og key.
when powering ON are shown.
ŏ Maximum and minimum date reset
by pressing the Jog key for 1 second.
"VIB" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
ŏ"DN" will show that an
alarm will start when
the E;T-9OLT drops
below the set value.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
ŏYou can hear the Extra
9oltage data through an
earphone or headset, by
Activating the Speech
function.
ŏ Switch selection
OFF
ON
2 Position
Alert set : Low-temperature warning
1. Move the cursor to the DN:(ALERT) item.
2. Select the ACT mode by press the -key.
3. Move the cursor to the DN:(LIMIT)>value@item.
4. Ajust the rate by press the -key.
Initial value: 5.09
Adjustment range: 3.5a8.49(BATTERY)
Adjustment range: 0a709(E;T-9OLT)
*When the + - key simultaneous press, the rate is reset to the
initial value.
(To terminate the input and return to the
original state, touch the END key.)
82
OFF
OFF
ON
3 Position
SENSOR
Sensor Slot
(Common)
Function
This screen registers the telemetry sensors used
with the transmitter. When only one of a certain
type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary
and the sensor can be used by simply connecting it
to the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.
When using 2 or more of the same kind of
sensor, they must be registered here.
[What is a slot?]
6HUYRVDUHFODVVL¿HGE\&+EXWsensorsDUHFODVVL¿HGLQXQLWVFDOOHG"slot". There are slots
from No. 1 to No. 31.
Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data sensor units may use multiple slots.
Using a sensor which uses two or more slots, the required number of slots is automatically
assigned by setting up a start slot.
When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor are used, the sensors themselves must allocate
unused slots and memorize that slot.
● Jog key presses side and makes it 2 pages.
Common function
● The "SENSOR" of a menu is chosen, and Jog key
press.
● 8 slots SBS-01G is used.
● Slot number
● 3 slots SBS-01A is ● SensorID：When multiple sensors of the same type are
not used, ID is unnecessary.
used.
＜ Assignable slot ＞
Sensor
TEMP(SBS-01T)
RPM(SBS01RM,SBS01RO)
*Altimeter, GPS, and other sensors that display a large amount of data require multiple slots.
*Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited.
The required
number of slots
1 slot
The number which can be used as a start slot
Selling area
1 〜 31
1 slot
1 〜 31
Voltage(SBS-01V)
2 slot
Altitude(SBS-01A)
3 slot
GPS(SBS-01G)
TEMP125-F1713
8 slot
1 slot
VARIO-F1712
2 slot
VARIO-F1672
2 slot
CURR-F1678
3 slot
GPS-F1675
8 slot
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
8,16,24
1 〜 31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
8,16,24
Global
Europe
83
● REGISTER（When using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.）
7KLVIXQFWLRQUHJLVWHUVDQDGGLWLRQDOVHQVRU&RQQHFWWKHVHQVRUDVVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUHDQGUHJLVWHULWE\
WKHIROORZLQJSURFHGXUH7KHVHQVRU,'LVUHJLVWHUHGLQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
Sensor connect
Receiver battery
Hub
Sensor
T10J
Connect a sensor to add
Method
Calling the setting screen
Common function
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "SENSOR"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
④ Jog key presses side
and makes it 6pages.
Left 1-time
press
or
Right 10time press
Sensor register
① "REGISTER" in SENSOR SLOT page
6 is chosen by Jog key.
② Press the Jog key for 1 second.
● Confirmation message
"sure?" blinks.
③ Press the Jog key.
● A confirmation "beep"
sounds when complete.
● "COMU-ERROR" : When the number of slots
needed in registration is insufficient, an error is
displayed and registration cannot be performed.
84
● SENS SLOT
This procedure changes the slot number of one registered sensor.
Sensor connection
Receiver battery
Hub
Sensor
T10J
Connect a sensor to add
Calling the setting screen
① "SENS SLOT" in SENSOR SLOT page
6 is chosen by Jog key.
② Jog key press.
Common function
● READ is chosen and Jog
key is pressed → "sure?"
→ Jog key is pressed.
● Number is chosen, Input a
number by the ＋ key or −
key.
*Referred to
● "COMU-ERROR" when
reading goes wrong.
＜ Assignable slot ＞
● Once the sensor is read correctly, the Sensor
ID will be displayed
85
● INITIALIZE
This function returns the slot setting and alarm setting of each sensor to their initial value (shipped state).
Various sensors can be used one by one.
*The slot number memorized at each sensor cannot be initialized.
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "SENSOR"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
④ Jog key presses side and makes
it 6 pages
Common function
Left 1-time
press
or
Right 10time press
Initialize
① "INITIALIZE" in SENSOR SLOT page
6 is chosen by Jog key.
② Press the Jog key for 1 second.
● Confirmation message
"sure?" blinks.
86
③ Press the Jog key.
● The initialization is done
w hen " C omple t e " is
shown.
● ALL CLEAR
7KLVIXQFWLRQVHWVDOOWKHVORWVWR,1+6HQVRUVFDQQRWEHXVHGHYHQLIFRQQHFWHGWRWKHUHFHLYHU$OOWKH
alarm settings of each sensor are also cleared.
*The slot number memorized at each sensor is not initialized.
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "SENSOR"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
④ Jog key presses side and makes
it 6 pages
Common function
Left 1-time
press
or
Right 10time press
All clear
① "ALL CLEAR" in SENSOR SLOT page
6 is chosen by Jog key.
② Press the Jog key for 1 second.
● Confirmation message
"sure?" blinks.
③ Press the Jog key.
● The clearing is done
when "Complete" is
shown.
87
● Manually assigning a sensor slot number
$VORWQXPEHUFDQEHDVVLJQHGZLWKRXWFRQQHFWLQJWKHVHQVRUWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHU,QDPDQXDOVHWLWLV
required to store a start slot number in a sensor.
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "SENSOR"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
④ Jog key is pressed in a side and it
searches for an empty slot. (INHIBIT).
Common function
Assignment of slot
① When an INHIBIT slot is selected
and the Jog key is pressed, a list
of sensors that can be assigned to
that slot is displayed.
*Refer to the <Assignable slots>
table.
88
② Select the sensor you want to
assign and press the Jog key.
③ Press the END key.
END
SBUS LINK
S.BUS servo link
(Common)
Function
An S.BUS servo can memorize the channel and
various settings you input. Servo setting can be
performed on the T10J screen by wiring the servo
DVVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUH
* With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions with
FDQQRW EH XVHG ,I D IXQFWLRQ FDQQRW EH XVHG WKH GLVSOD\
screen will change. (Only the function which can be used by
a servo is displayed.)
$IWHUUHDGLQJFRPSOHWLRQZLWKFRQQHFWLRQRIWKHDERYH¿JXUH
if a stick is moved, the test of operation of the servo can be
operated and carried out.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "SBUS LINK"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Common function
④ Press the Jog key
for 1 second.
（1 second）
⑤ Connect a S.BUS servo to set up.
Receiver battery
CAUTION
HUB
● Don
t connect a servo until
"MODE IN".
T10J
S.BUS/
S.BUS2 Servo
ŶOtherwise, a servo will vibrate and
break down.
S.BUS Servo setting
⑤ "READ" is chosen by Jog key, Press
the Jog key for 1 second.
⑥ READ is completed and
the item in which data of
S.BUS servo and a setup
are possible is displayed.
* "COMU-ERROR" :
It is failure of READ. Check a
servo and connection.
⑦ S.BUS servo is set up.
⑧ "WRITE" is chosen and Jog key
is pressed for 1 second.
The writing is done when
"Complete" is shown.
Next page S.BUS servo function
89
S.BUS Servo Description of function of each parameter
*There are a function which can be used according to the kind of servo, and an impossible
function.
ID =
[ ID ]
Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.
CHAN ▶
[ Channel ]
Channel of the S.BUS system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.
NEUT ▶
[ Neutral Offset ]
Common function
The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range
of travel is restricted on one side.
EPA ▶
[ Travel Adjust ]
The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.
DEAD ▶
[ Dead band ]
The dead band angle at stopping can be specified.
[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]
Small ĺ Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal
change.
Large ĺ Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.
(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the
current consumption will increase and the life of the servo will be shortened.
REVE ▶
[ Reverse ]
The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.
STRE ▶
[ Stretcher ]
The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the
target position when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be
adjusted.
This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown
below.
[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]
Small ĺ Servo holding force becomes weaker.
Large ĺ Servo holding force becomes stronger.
(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.
90
BOST ▶ 3% 〜 45%
[ Boost ]
The minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since
a small travel does not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded.
The motor can be immediately started by adjusting the minimum current which can start the
motor.
[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]
Small ĺ Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.
Large ĺ Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is too
large, operation will become rough.
DAMP ▶
[ Damper ]
The characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.
When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot
characteristic. If the value is larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the
stop position.
[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]
Small ĺ When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.
Large ĺ When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel like
the servo response has worsened.
(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the
life of the servo will also be shortened.
BSTM ▶ ON/OFF
Common function
Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting
may occur, depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo
to oscillate) occurs even though the Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are
suitable, adjust this parameter to a value larger than the initial value.
[ Boost ON/OFF ]
OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual)
ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope)
SPED ▶
[ Speed Control ]
Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can
be matched without being affected by motor fluctuations. This is effective for load torques
below the maximum torque.
However, note that the maximum speed will not be exceed what the servo is capable of even
if the servos operating voltage is increased.
STAR ▶
[ Soft Start ]
Restricts operation in the specified direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this
setting, the first initial movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the
specified position.
SMOT ▶
[ Smoother ]
This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement
changes. Smooth setting is used for normal flight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick
operation is necessary such as 3D.
91
MDL-TRANS
Model transfer
Function
(Common)
*T10J does not carry out normal operation during data transfer.
Transmission of model data is possible with
T10J transmitters. Data transfer is performed by
the radio. The MDL-TRANS function works with
the current model you are using in the transmitter.
As for the receiving transmitter, any data on the
current model that is receiving the information will
be over-written.
Method
CAUTION
Always check servo direction prior to every
flight as an additional precaution to confirm
proper model date, hook ups, and radio function.
NOTE: MDL-TRANS between two T10J radios should
be performed within a 2-meter range.
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "MDL-TRANS"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
Common function
MODE：
TRANSFER（T10J of data
origin ）
／
R E C E I V E（T10J w h i c h
receives data）
Execution of transmission/
reception
Model transfer
● MDL-TRANS between two T10J radios should be performed within
① In each T10J, the ＋ or − key is pressed and it is
made "TRANSFER" and "RECEIVE".
＋
−
or
● "TRANSFER"：T10J of data origin
"RECEIVE"：T10J which receives data
Selection range：TRANSFER, RECEIVE
2-meter range.
② Select "Execute" with the Jog key.
Perform the following work from
[1]RECEIVE T10J to [2]TRANSFER
T10J in order.
③ Hold down the Jog key the RECEIVE T10J.
④ Hold down the Jog key the TRANSFER T10J.
（1 second )
● "Complete" is displayed and the mode
transfer is finished.
● From T8J to T10J, data transfer is possible. In that case, TYPE
of T10J on the "RECEIVER" side is changed into "T8J" by ＋−
key. However, data cannot be sent to T8J from T10J.
92
● If data is not being transmitted, the receiving transmitter
returns to normal operation 10 seconds after execution. At
this time, "Failure" (not transmitting) is displayed.
TRAINER
Trainer
(Common)
Function
6LQFHWKHFKDQQHODQGRSHUDWLRQPRGHXVHGLQWUDLQLQJFDQEHVHOHFWHGWKHWUDLQLQJGLI¿FXOW\FDQEHVHW
to match the student’s level.
The trainer function can be used by connecting the instructor’s transmitter to the student’s transmitter
XVLQJDVSHFLDOWUDLQHUFRUG VROGVHSDUDWHO\ 6WXGHQWRSHUDWLRQLVSRVVLEOHE\LQVWUXFWRUVZLWFKRSHUDWLRQ,I
the student enters a dangerous situation, control can be immediately switched to the instructor.
● Four operation modes can be selected at each channel.
● The trainer switch is set to switch H.
Trainer code
When the trainer function is used, the snap roll function is automatically
deactivated.
Teacher
CAUTION
Student
Use the trainer function under the following conditions:
Trainer function operation modes
● FNC mode: The channel set to this mode can be controlled by the student using the mixing set at
the instructorʼ s transmitter. *Student settings are returned to their initial value in advance. Next,
reverse function makes all channels normal.
● MIX mode: The channel set to this mode is controlled by mixing the instructor and student signals.
Correction rudder is applied by the instructor. When this mode is selected, the studentʼ s rate is
reduced to prevent servo overthrow. The studentʼ s rate can also be set. *Student settings are
returned to their initial value in advance. Next, reverse function makes all channels normal.
● NOR mode: The channel set to this mode is controlled by signals from the studentʼ s transmitter. (The
instructor and student settings must be the same.)
● OFF mode: The channel set to this mode cannot be controlled by the student. It can only be controlled
by the instructor.
Common function
● When the instructor uses a T10J transmitter, set the studentʼ s transmitter modulation to PPM (for
conventional frequency transmitter). (When the student uses a T10J transmitter, the modulation
mode does not have to be changed. A PPM signal is always output from the trainer jack.)
● Before flight always confirm that all the instructor and student channels operate normally as set.
● Always insert the trainer cord as far as it will go and take measures so that the cord will not work
loose during use.
● Always remove the high frequency module of the studentʼ s transmitter. (For module type)
● Never turn on the studentʼ s transmitter power switch.
However, channels not provided at the studentʼ s transmitter are controlled by the instructor regardless of the above
settings.
When other models are selected, the trainer function is deactivated, but the channel settings remain.
Example of use
● When the FUNC mode is set at the stick channel, helicopter stick operation training is possible even
with a 4EX transmitter (4 channels for aircraft).
● Control by the instructor is possible by setting only the training channel matched to the studentʼ s
level to the NORM mode and setting the other channels to the OFF mode.
◆ Trainer Cords
Instructor
Student
Trainer Cords
10J
10C, 9C, 7C, 6EX, 4EX
18MZ,14MZ, 14SG,
FX-22, 12Z, 12FG,
8FG, 10J, 8J, 6J
T12FG (FUTM4405)
18MZ,14MZ,
14SG, FX-22, 12Z,
12FG, 8FG, 10C,
9C, 7C, 8J, 6J, 4EX
T12FG (FUTM4405) and 9C
(FUTM4415) Trainer Cords
10J
93
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the + key
for 1 second.
＋
② Select "TRAINER"
from the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（1 second）
（Trainer function）
● Select the item with the
Jog key.
Function activation
● Channel setting mode display
Channel Select
Common function
Select CH mode Display
Rate by student（at MIX mode）
＜ ChannelDisplay ＞
ACROBATIC
HELICOPTER
1: AIL（Aileron） 6: FLP（Flap）
2: ELE（Elevator） 7: AU7
3: THR（Throttle）8: AU8
4: RUD（Rudder）
5: GER（Gear）
1: AIL（Aileron） 6: PIT
（PITCH）
2: ELE（Elevator） 7: AU7
3: THR（Throttle） 8: AU8
4: RUD（Rudder）
5: GYR（GYRO）
GLIDER (AF2)
*CH9 and CH10 cannot use a trainer function.
Trainer function
■ Function activation
① Select the "OFF" by
pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
＋
■ Mode setting
−
② The mode of the channel of hope
is chosen by pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
or
（When MIX mode Select）
■ Student rate setting
③ Jog key is pressed in a side
and a channel is chosen, rate
setting by pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
＋
Range：0 〜 100%
Default：30%
＋
Selection range：OFF,
NOR, FNC, MIX、
Default：OFF
● When you do not want to use the
function select INH.
94
MULTICOPTER
1: AIL（Aileron） 6: FL2（Flap2） 1: AIL（Aileron） 6: AU6
2: ELE（Elevator） 7: AI2（Aileron2） 2: ELE（Elevator） 7: AU7
3: MOT（Motor） 8: AU8
3: THR（Throttle） 8: AU8
4: RUD（Rudder）
4: RUD（Rudder）
5: FLP（Flap）
5: MOD（Mode）
−
or
−
or
Airplane Function
The setting screen of each function is called from the following menu. The function when
the model type was set to airplane (ACROBATIC) is displayed here.
Power ON
● First set the
throttle to slow.
To menu screen
by holding down
the + key
● Then turn on the
power.
（Home screen）
● When t h e E N D k e y i s
pressed, the display returns
to the home screen.
END
● When the + key is pressed for
1 second, the menu screen is
（1 second）
displayed.
＋
MENU
Airplane
MENU
1/3
（Selection）
MENU
2/3
● Move the cursor
(highlighted) up and down
and to the left and right
with the Jog key and select
the function.
The cursor can be moved
over several pages.
（Calling the setting screen）
MENU
3/3
● Press the Jog key to open the
setting screen.
95
key ／ LCD
●＋ key
●− key
●Jog key
●END key
Refer to "Common Functions"
previously described for a
description of this function.
■ Function
MENU1/3
MDL-SEL
(P.40)
TELEMETRY
(P.66)
D/R, EXPO
Model select ／ Model Copy ／ Data
reset ／ RX ／ Link
Telemetry Display ／ Alarm setup
Dual rate ／ EXPO
MDL-NAME
SENSOR
FLAPERON
Telemetry sensor
(P.43)
Model name ／ User name
FAIL SAFE
(P.45)
Fail safe
Airplane
REVERSE
(P.47)
Servo reverse
TIMER
(P.48)
Aileron → Rudder
End point
V-TAIL
TRIM
V-Tail
GYRO SENS
(P.52)
Sub trim
P.MIX1-6
Program mixing 1 〜 6
AUX-CHAN
AUX channel
PARAMETER
Data reset ／ Model type ／ ATLtrim ／ LCD contrast ／ Back light :
mode, time, adjustment ／ Home
display ／ Battery alarm ／ Battery
vibration ／ Buzzer tone ／ Jog
navi ／ Jog light ／ Jog time ／
Telemetry : mode, unit ／ Speech :
language, volume ／ Stick position
alarm
(P.110)
(P.111)
FLAP TRIM
(P.112)
Flap trim
(P.98)
THR.CUT
(P.113)
Throttle cut
(P.99)
IDLE DOWN
(P.115)
Idle down
(P.100)
SNAP ROLL
(P.116)
Snap roll
(P.101)
THR-CURVE
(P.117)
Throttle curve
(P.102)
PIT-CURVE
(P.118)
PIT-curve
Ailvator
THR → NEEDL
(P.58)
(P.97)
Elevon
AILVATOR
(P.56)
(P.108)
Elevator → Flap mixing
Gyro mixing
ELEVON
(P.53)
FLAP → ELE
ELE → FLAP
(P.93)
Trainer
AIL → RUD
SUB TRIM
(P.92)
TRAINER
END POINT
(P.106)
Air brake
Flap → Elevator mixing
Servo monitor ／ Servo test
(P.51)
AIR-BRK
Data transfer of another 10J or 8J
SERVO
(P.50)
(P.89)
MDL-TRANS
Aileron Differential
(P.104)
Flaperon
S.BUS servo set up
AIL-DIFF
(P.49)
(P.83)
SBUS LINK
Timer
Trim reset ／ Trim step
96
MENU3/3
MENU2/3
(P.103)
Throttle → Needle Mixing
THR DELAY
Throttle delay
(P.119)
AIL-DIFF
Aileron differential
(ACROBATIC)
Function
The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently. This function is restricted
to 2 servo aileron.
CH1
CH7
NOTE：Aileron Differential cannot be used simultaneously with Flaperon or Elevon. If
another function is already active, “Others WING mix “ON” is displayed on the screen. After
setting the active function to “INH” , set the Aileron Differential function to “ACT” .
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "AIL-DIFF"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
（Aileron）
Aileron1
（CH1）
rate
Aileron2
（CH7）rate
L：Aileron stick Left side rate
R：Aileron stick Right side rate
Airplane
ACT/INH
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used. To use
the function, select ACT.
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
Aileron Differential
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
■ Aileron rate
② Select the "RATE-AIL1" item and move
the aileron stick to the left and right
and adjust the travel of each servo by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
or
Range：-120 〜 +120%
Default：+100%
● When you do not use a
function, set to the "INH"
side.
● When you want to return to the initial value, press the + key
and ‒ key simultaneously. However, when the polarity is
changed only the number returns to the initial value.
（Adjust the "RATE-AIL2" item in the same way as ② .）
97
AIL → RUD
Aileron → Rudder mixing
(ACROBATIC)
Function
Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders
with aileron operation. This allows the aircraft to
bank at a steep angle.
ŏ:hen the linkage direction is reversed by the
linkage, adjustments can be made by changing
the rate polarity.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "AIL → RUD"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
● When not using this function,
select INH.
Mixing rate
Airplane
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
Aileron → Rudder Mixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select
the "ON" by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
98
−
■ Mixing rate
② S e l e c t t h e " R AT E " i t em a n d
then adjust the mixing rate by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：+50%
● When you do not use a function, set
to the "INH" side.
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
However, polarity does not return.
V-TAIL
V-Tail
(ACROBATIC)
Function
Ｖ-tail
This mixing is used with V tail aircraft that
combine the elevator and rudder functions.
NOTE：V Tail cannot be used simultaneously with
Elevon or Ailevator. When another function is already
activated, “Other WING mix “ON” ” is displayed on the
screen. Set the V tail function to ACT after setting the
active function to INH.
CH2 (CH4)
Elevator
Rudder
Method
CH4 (CH2)
CH2 Servo
ELE1
RUD2
CH4 Servo
ELE2
RUD1
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "V-TAIL"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
ELE1 rate
ELE2 rate
（Rate adjustment）
RUD2 rate
RUD1 rate
Airplane
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used. To use
the function, select ACT.
Activating the function
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
V-TAIL
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a
function, set to the "INH" side.
■ Rate adjustment
② Select the "RATE" item and then adjust
the mixing rate by pressing the + key or
‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：+50%
（only ELE2 : -50%）
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously. However, polarity does not
return.
NOTE：We recommend that setting be performed while moving the stick and checking the amount of movement.
If the amount of movement is too large, elevator and rudder operation will be compounded and the servo travel
range will be exceeded and a dead band in which the servo will not operate may be created.
99
GYRO SENS
Gyro sensor
(ACROBATIC)
Function
flight, the gyro will lose control of the plane·s
attitude. From the standpoint of safety, we
recommend that the OFF (0) position also be set
using a 3 position switch.
ŏCH5, CH5CH7, CH5CH8 or CH5CH7CH8
combinations can be selected as the sensitivity
setting channel.
This function is dedicated mixing for switching
the gyro sensitivity and gyro mode (AVCS/
NORMAL) of Futaba airplane use gyros. Up to 3
axes can be set.
ŏThe sensitivity switch can be selected and the
sensitivity of each direction of the switch can be
set. (Switches A to H) If the airplane stalls during
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "GYRO SENS"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● When not using this function,
select INH.
Activating the function
Gain Channel selection
Switch direction
Sensitivity switch selection
（C u r r e n t s w i t c h o p e r a t i n g
direction）
Airplane
Gyrotype,
Gain rate
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
（Gyro type）
（Gyro Gain）
● Switches to the
sensitivity setting
screen of each switch
direction when the
Jog key is pressed.
● When using a Futaba GYA gyro, select gyro type GY. This switches the gyro sensitivity setting
item to mode and sensitivity direct reading display.
GYRO SENS
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item
and then select the
"ON" by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
＋
■ Sensitivity switch selection
② Select the "SW" item and then select the
switch by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
or
＋
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ Sensitivity setting channel selection
③ Select the ＋
−
"CH" i tem an d
or
then select
the sensitivity
setting channel by pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
Range：CH5、CH5/CH7,
CH5/CH8, CH5/CH7/CH8
Default：CH5
100
−
or
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
Default：SwA
■ Gyro type and sensitivity setting
④ Press the Jog key and select the sensitivity setting
screen you want to set and then set “type” (gyro type)
and “rate” (gyro sensitivity) of each channel by pressing
the +key or ‒ key.
（"type"）Range：STD, GY
Default：STD
（"rate"）Range：0 〜 100%(STD), NOR100 〜 0 〜
AVC100%（GY） Default：50%(STD), 0%
（GY）
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
ELEVON
Elevon
(ACROBATIC)
Function
CH2
This mixing is used with delta wing, tailess, and disk shaped
airplanes that combine the aileron and elevator functions.
Connect the CH1 servo to the left aileron and the CH2 servo to the
right aileron.
CH1
Pitch
ŏThe aileron and elevator travel can be adjusted individually.
CH2
NOTE：Elevon cannot be used simultaneously with V-tail or Ailevator
functions. You may use Flaperon or Differential when this function is active.
If another function is already active, “Other WING mix “ON” is displayed
on the screen. After setting the active function to “INH” , set the elevon
function to “ACT” .
CH1
Roll
Roll
Pitch
CH1 servo
AIL1
ELE2
CH2 servo
AIL2
ELE1
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "ELEVON"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Aileron1
（CH1）rate
Aileron2
（CH2）rate
（Aileron rate）
L：Aileron stick Left side rate
R：Aileron stick Right side rate
Elevator2
（CH1）rate
Elevator1
（CH2）rate
Airplane
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used. To use
the function, select ACT.
Activating the function
（Elevator rate）
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
ELEVON
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a function,
set to the "INH" side.
■ Rate set
② Select the "RATE" item and then adjust
the mixing rate by pressing the + key or
‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-120 〜 +120%
Default：+100%
（only ELE1 : -100%）
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.However, polarity does not
return.
NOTE：We recommend that setting be performed while moving the stick and checking the amount of movement. If
the amount of movement is too large, elevator and aileron operation will be compounded and the servo travel range
will be exceeded and a dead band in which the servo will not operate may be created.
101
AILVATOR
Ailvator
(ACROBATIC)
Function
Ailevator mixes both Ailerons and Elevators together. Or the
function can be used separate from your ailerons when you have two
(OHYDWRUVHUYRV6LQFHWKHUHDUHDLUFUDIWOLNHMHW¿JKWHUVWKDWXVHWKH
elevators as ailerons, using this function can give you a sense of reality.
$LOHURQRSHUDWLRQFDQDOVREHXVHGZLWKHOHYDWRUVHUYRVSHFL¿FDWLRQV
The servos connect to the receiver CH2 and CH8 output.
ŏElevator and aileron travel can be adjusted individually.
ŏConÀrm the direction of operation, because it is different depending
on the linkage.
CH 6
(CH7)
CH 1
CH 2
（CH 8）
Roll
Pitch
CH 8
（CH 2）
CH2 servo
AIL3
ELE1
CH8 servo
AIL4
ELE2
NOTE：Ailevator cannot be used simultaneously with V-tail or Elevon functions. When “Other WING mix “ON” “is
displayed on the screen, set the ailvator function to ACT after setting the active function to INH.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "AILVATOR"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Airplane
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
Activating the function
AIL3 Rate set
AIL4 Rate set
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used. To use
the function, select ACT.
（Rate）
ELE2 Rate set
ELE1 Rate set
AILVATOR
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a
function, set to the "INH" side.
■ Rate set
② Select the "RATE" item and then adjust
the mixing rate by pressing the + key or
‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：-50%（AIL3, AIL4）,
-100%（ELE2）,+100%（ELE1）
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.However, polarity does not
return.
NOTE：We recommend that setting be performed while moving the stick and checking the amount of movement. If
the amount of movement is too large, elevator and aileron operation will be compounded and the servo travel range
will be exceeded and a dead band in which the servo will not operate may be created.
● When used as 2 elevator servos specifications without aileron operation, set the AIL3 and AIL4 travel to 0%.
102
THR → NEEDL
Throttle → Needle mixing
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This function is used when the engine is
equipped with a mixture control system (needle
control and other mixture adjustments to the
engine).
The throttle control servo connects to receiver
CH8.
ŏThe mixture can be set by 5 point curve in relation
to the throttle stick.
ŏAn acceleration function which accelerates the
engine to the optimal mixture when the throttle is
opened can be set.
NOTE：This cannot be used if Ailevator function
is active as they cannot be used simultaneously.
“AILVATOR mix “ON” “is displayed on the screen. Set the
THR → NEEDL function to ACT after setting the active
function to INH.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "THR → NEEDL"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● When not using this function,
select INH.
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
5 Point curve set
（Cursor moves with a
THR stick）
Acceleration rate
● The set-up curve is shown
Airplane
Activating the function
Throttle curve
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" ＋
it em a n d t h e n
select the "ON"
by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
−
or
■ 5 point curve setting
② Select the setting item (P-1 〜 P-5) and then set the
travel of each point by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
● When you do not use a function, set
to the "INH" side.
Range：0 〜 100%
Default：P-1:0%, P-2:25%, P-3:50%,
P-4:75%, P-5:100%
● An acceleration function helps the engine compensate
■ Acceleration rate
③ Select the "ACC" item and adjust the acceleration for sudden, large amounts of throttle input by making
the mixture suddenly richer, then easing it back to
amount by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
Range：0 〜 100%, Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to
the initial value, press the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
NOTE： When using the acceleration function, since the
needle stroke is large, adjust your settings so there
is no binding of your linkage.
the proper adjustment for that throttle setting. This
function requires some adjustment to best fit your
engine and your flying style. Adjust engineʼ s response
until no hesitation occurs on rapid throttle input.
● Superfluous operation of a needle servo becomes
large as it approaches to 100%. Moreover, time to
usually return to a position becomes late.
103
D/R,EXPO
Dual rate ／ EXPO
(ACROBATIC)
Function
D/R
The aileron, elevator and rudder channel control surface angle can be switched in 2 steps
ŏThe control surface angle is adjusted by each direction of the switch. The left and right (up and down)
direction of each switch can be set individually.
EXP
This function makes operation more pleasant by changing the operating curve so that servo movement
is sluggish or sensitive relative to stick operation near the aileron, elevator, throttle, and rudder neutral
position. Adjustments can be made in 2 steps according to the control surface angle.
ŏThe ´-µ side makes servo movement sluggish and the ´µ side makes servo movement sensitive near the
neutral position. Exponential is applied to entire throttle servo travel. :hen the ´µ side is increased, the
slow side becomes sluggish and the high side becomes sensitive.
ŏSetting corresponding to each rate of dual rate (DR) is possible. (Except throttle) The direction of each
switch and the left and right (up and down) direction of each channel can be set individually.
Switch selection（SW）
Switches A to H can be selected as the aileron channel, elevator channel, and rudder channel dual rate
(exponential) switch.
ŏDefault：Aileron：SwitchD ／ Elevator：SwitchA ／ Rudder：SwitchB
Method
Airplane
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "D/R, EXPO"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● The channel under selection is
underlined.
Channel selection
Dual rate
（Switch Direction）
EXPO
● The dual rate and exponential
settings are displayed by a
curve.
Switch selection
● Channel selection/Select
the setting item with the
Jog key.
104
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（Switch No.）
（D/R and EXPO rate display）
Top row；Left side ／ down
Bottom row；Right side ／ up
＜ Channel ＞
1：Aileron
2：Elevator
3：Throttle
4：Rudder
D/R
① A channel is chosen by Jog
key.
Range：1, 2, 4
② Adjust the rate by moving the cursor
to D/R with the Jog key, switching the
dual rate switch to the direction you
want to set, moving the stick to the left
(down) or right (up) side and pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
Range：
0 〜 140%
Default：100%
● When you want to
return the set value to
the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
Adjust the rate of each direction of the dual rate switch and stick by repeating step
● Moving to another setting item of the same
channel is possible by Jog key.
EXPO
① Select the "EXP" item and
then select the channel with
the Jog key.
② Adjust the rate by moving the cursor
to EXP with the Jog key, switching the
dual rate switch to the direction you
want to set, moving the stick to the left
(down) or right (up) side and pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
Range：1 〜 4
Range：
-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
● When you want to
return the set value to
the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
● Moving to another setting item of the
same channel is possible by Jog key.
Airplane
Adjust the rate of each direction of the dual rate switch and stick by repeating step
Switch Change
① Select the "SW" item and then select
the channel with the Jog key.
② A switch is chosen by + key or -key.
＋
−
or
Range：1, 2, 4
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
105
FLAPERON
Flaperon
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This mixing function mixes two ailerons and also gives the
DLOHURQVDÀDSIXQFWLRQ$LOHURQDQGOHIWDQGULJKWDLOHURQFRQWURO
surfaces can be raised at the same time. If this function is used
together with air brake function, the aircraft speed can be dropped
when landing and is effective in narrow places. Connect the left
aileron servo to CH1 (AIL) and the right aileron servo to CH6
(FLP).
ŏThe up and down angle of the left and right aileron control
surfaces can be adjusted individually.
ŏThe left and right Áap travel can also be adjusted individually.
CH1
CH6
Aileron
Operation
Flap Operation
CH6 servo
CH1 servo
Right Aileron
Left Aileron
Flap1
Flap2
NOTE：Only the Flaperon, AileronDifferential, or Elevon functions can
be used. They cannot be turned on simultaneously. When another
function is already activated, “Other WING mix “ON” “is displayed on the
screen. Set the Flaperon function to ACT after setting the active function
to INH.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
Airplane
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
Aileron1
（CH1）rate
Aileron2
（CH6）rate
Flap2（CH1）rate
Flap1（CH6）rate
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
106
② Select "FLAPERON"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used. To use
the function, select ACT.
（Aileron rate）
L：Aileron stick Left side rate
R：Aileron stick Right side rate
（Flap rate）
Flaperon
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
■ Aileron rate
② Select "RATE-AIL1" and operate the
aileron stick to the left and right and
adjust the travel of each servo by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
or
Range：-120 〜 +120%
Default：100%
● When you do not use a
function, set to the "INH" side.
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously. However, when
the polarity is changed, only the number is returned to the
initial value.
(The “RATE-AIL 2” item is adjusted in the same way as ② .）
（When flap trim is used, make the settings shown below.）
● However, set the basic travel with the Flap function in advance.（Default：0%）
■ Flap rate
③ Select the "RATE-FLP2" item and adjust
the Flap2 travel by pressing the + key or
‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-120 〜 +120%
Default：+100%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.However, polarity does not
return.
Airplane
（The “RATE-FLP1” item is adjusted in the same way as ③ .
However, the “RATE-FLP1” side initial value is -100%.）
Flaperon ACT
CH1
CH6
When flaperon is active, the
ailerons can be controlled by the
servos connected to CH1 and CH6.
The servo travel can be adjusted
by the left and right end points.
Air brake ACT
CH1
CH6
The left and right ailerons can
be raised (brake operation) and
lowered (flap operation) at the
same time by setting SW-C to its
lowest position.
107
AIR-BRK
Air brake
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This function is used when the air brake is
necessary during landing and is turned on and off
by switch C (initial setting).
ŏNormally when the ailerons are used as a brake,
they are raised (UP side)
ŏ:hen the operation mode is ´OFSTµ (offset), the
air brake is controlled by switch operation. :hen
the operation mode is ´LINRµ (linear), the air brake
is operated linearly at switch ON and from the
control stick set position.
ŏIf the ´LINRµ mode was selected, the throttle stick
controls CH3 and the air brake operation, but
it can be separated from CH3 operation. CH 3
control can be switched from stick to stick or to
9R knob. However, when other than stick was
selected, the throttle trim and function reverse
functions cannot be used.
ŏ:hen used in the ´LINRµ mode, adjust the travel
with the throttle stick at the maximum slow side
(braking amount maximum).
● Adjustment item for every wing type
Display
（Normal）
Flaperon
Aileron
Differential
AIL1(1CH)
ELEV(2CH)
FLAP(6CH)
AIL2(7CH)
----Elevator
Flap
-----
Aileron1
Elevator
Aileron2
-----
Aileron1
Elevator
Flap
Aileron2
CH2
CH 2
CH 6
CH 1
Method
Airplane
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
Rate set
Delay Rate set
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
108
② Select "AIR-BRK"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
$,5%5.
3CH Control set
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/
Off is shown when active and
assigned to a switch.
Switch selection
Switch direction
Mode
● When the “LINR” operation mode was selected, the current throttle stick position is displayed
at the operation reference point and in the bottom row parentheses.
Air brake
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select
the "ON" or "OFF" by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
＋
■ Rate set
② Select the "rate" item and
adjust the servo travel by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
−
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：+50%（ELEV only -10%）
or
● When you do not use a function, set
to the "INH" side.
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
However, polarity does not return.
■ Delay Rate set
③ Select the "delay" item and adjust the elevator
operation delay by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● The amount of delay is large at 100%.
Range：0 〜 100%、Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press the + key
and ‒ key simultaneously.
（In the case of change of a switch）
■ Switch selection
① Select the "SW"
i tem an d t h e n
select the switch
by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
＋
−
or
Range：
● 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
● 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN, DOWN
（In the case of change of a mode）
■ Mode
①S e l e c t t h e ＋
−
"MOD" item
or
and select the
operation mode
by pressing the + key or the ‒ key.
Range：OFST, LINR
Default：OFST
Airplane
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
Default：SwC
■ Switch direction
② Select the ON direction by
pressing the + key or ‒ key at
the ON direction selection item.
■ Operation reference point setting ("LINR" mode
only)
② Select the operation reference point setting
item newly displayed at the bottom row
of "MOD" and hold the throttle stick at the
air brake start point and set the reference point by
pressing the Jog key for 1 second.
Range：0 〜 100%
（When 3CH control is changed at the time of "LINR"）
■ "LINR" mode 3CH control
① Select the "CH3" item and select control by pressing the +key or ‒
key.
Range：THR, SwA 〜 SwH, VR, DT5, DT6
Default：THR
109
FLAP → ELE
Flap → Elevator mixing
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This mixing is used to compensate for pitch
FKDQJHV HOHYDWRUGLUHFWLRQ DWÀDSRSHUDWLRQ
ŏ:hen the mixing direction is reversed by the
linkage adjustment is possible by changing the
rate polarity.
ŏThe mixing reference point can be shifted. (OFFSET)
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "FLAP → ELE"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
)/$3 ‫( ڀ‬/(
● When not using this function,
select INH.
Activating the function
Mixing rate
Airplane
Mixing offset rate
（P r e s e n t f l a p o p e r a t i n g
position）
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
Flap → ElevatorMixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select
the "ON" by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
■ Mixing rate
② S e l e c t t h e " R AT E " i t em a n d
then adjust the mixing rate by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
（When changing the mixing reference point）
■ Mixing reference point offset setting
① Select the "OFFSET" item and turn the Flap knob to the
point you want to make the mixing reference point and
set the reference point by pressing the Jog key for 1
second.
Range：-100 〜 +100% Default：0%
110
−
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
or
● When you do not use a function, set
to the "INH" side.
＋
（1 second）
ELE → FLAP
Elevator → Flap mixing
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This mixing is used when you want to apply mixing from elevators
WRÀDSV8VXDOO\PL[LQJLVVXFKWKDWWKHÀDSVDUHORZHUHGE\UDLVLQJ
the elevators. When used with Fun Fly and other aircraft, small loops
are possible.
Flap CH6
ŏThe up side and down side rates can be adjusted.
Method
Elevator CH2
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "ELE → FLAP"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
(/( ‫) ڀ‬/$3
Activating the function
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/
Off is shown when active and
assigned to a switch.
Mixing rate
Switch selection
Switch direction
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the selected switch.
○ 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
○ 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN, DOWN
Airplane
（Elevator down side rate）
（Elevator up side rate）
● This cursor position
operates and chooses an
elevator stick.
Elevator → FlapMixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item
and then select the ON
or OFF by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
＋
■ Switch selection
② Select the "SW" item
and then select the
switch by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ Switch direction
③ Select the "POSI
" by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key at
the ON direction
selection item.
＋
−
or
Range：
● 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
● 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C,
CNTR, C&DN, DOWN
＋
−
or
Range：SwA 〜 SwH、Default：SwC
■ Mixing rate
④ S e l e c t t h e " R AT E " i t e m a n d
then adjust the mixing rate by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
Range：-100 〜 +100%
＋
−
or
Default：+50%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
However, polarity does not return.
● RATE ↑ / ↓ cursor position operates and chooses an
elevator stick.
111
FLAP TRIM
Flap trim
(ACROBATIC)
Function
VR neutral
Single beep sound
This function trims the CH6 VR knob.
ŏThe trim travel can be adjusted.
*When the flaperon function is activated ( “ACT” ), this
function is turned on automatically. It can be turned
on and off independently.
Method
Flap neutral
VR turns
Flap adjustment
VR turns
Flap adjustment
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "FLAP TRIM"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
)/$375,0
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used. To use
the function, select ACT.
Activating the function
Airplane
Flap trim rate
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
Flap Trim
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a
function, set to the "INH" side.
112
■ Flap rate
② Select the "RATE" item and then adjust
the flap rate by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
THR.CUT
Throttle cut
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This function cuts (stops) the engine or motor
by stick operation. At throttle operation, the rate is
adjusted to the position which completely cuts the
throttle servo or ESC when the throttle is operated.
When Thr.Cut is active, the throttle position is held
regardless of the throttle stick position.
ŏNORESC operation mode switching. For motor
aircraft, select ESC. For motor aircraft, the throttle
position when the function is reset can be set so
the motor will not unexpectedly run at high speed
when the throttle cut function is reset. :hen the
throttle stick is higher than the set throttle position,
the throttle cut function is not reset even if the
switch is set to OFF. Set to a safe throttle position
(slow side).
ŏFunction operation can be selected from among
switches A 〜 H.
ŏSet the throttle cut function for safety also.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "THR.CUT"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Mode
Activating the function
Cut Position rate
Throttle Position
Switch selection
Switch direction
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/
Off is shown when active and
assigned to a switch.
Airplane
7+5&87
● Adjusts the rate to the position
that completely cuts the
throttle servo or ESC.
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the selected switch.
○ 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
○ 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN, DOWN
● The “THR” item can be set
when the operation mode
i s “E S C” . T h e n u m b e r i n
parentheses is the current
throttle stick position.
113
Throttle Cut
■ Mode
① Select the "MODE" item and then select the
mode by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
■ Activating the function
② Select the "MIX" item and then select the off
by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
−
or
or
Range：NOR, ESC
Default：NOR
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
● "NOR"：Engine plane
"ESC"：Electric motor plane
■ Switch selection
③ Select the "SW" item and then select
the switch by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
■ Switch direction
④ Select the "POSI" by pressing the + key or ‒ key at
the ON direction selection item.
＋
−
or
or
Range：
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
Default：SwA
Airplane
■ Cut Position rate
⑤ Select the "RATE" item and then select
the cht position by pressing the + key or
‒ key (motor stop).
＋
−
● 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
● 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN,
DOWN
（In the case of ESC ）
■ Function release Throttle Position
⑥ Select the "THR" item and then select the release
position by THR stick is lowered and Jog key is
pressed for 1 second.
or
● It adjusts to the position where an engine
is cut.
Range：-30 〜 0 〜 +30%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value
to the initial value, press the + key and ‒
key simultaneously.
114
● Set to a safe low throttle position.
Range：0 〜 100%
Default：15%
IDLE DOWN
Idle down
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This function is linked to the air brake switch
and gear switch and lowers the engine idle. It is
used when engine idle is set high to prevent the
HQJLQHIURPVWDOOLQJGXULQJÀLJKWDQG\RXZDQWWR
lower engine idle when landing.
ŏThe amount engine idle is lowered can be set.
ŏAt idling down operation, the stop lever adjusts the
idle down amount.
ŏFunction operation can be selected from among
switches A 〜 H. The switch direction can also be
selected.
Method
Calling the setting screen
② Select "IDLE DOWN"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
,'/('2:1
Activating the function
Idle down rate
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/
Off is shown when active and
assigned to a switch.
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the selected switch.
○ 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
○ 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN, DOWN
Idle down
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item
and then select the on
or off by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
Airplane
Switch selection
Switch direction
＋
■ Switch selection
② Select the "SW" item
and then select the
switch by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ Switch direction
③ Select the "POSI" by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key at the ON direction
selection item.
Range：
● 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
● 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C,
CNTR, C&DN, DOWN
＋
−
or
Range：SwA 〜 SwH、Default：SwC
■ Idle down rate
④ Select the "RATE" item and
then ad just the idle down
rate by pressing the + key or
‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：0 〜 40%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
● The idle down amount is usually 10% 〜 20%. Hold down the aircraft and set the throttle switch to the maximum
slow position while the engine is running and adjust the idle drop amount while turning the switch on and off.
115
SNAP ROLL
Snap roll
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This function performs snap roll by switch (SwH).
ŏThe roll direction is selected from among 4 directions (RU, LU, RD, LD) by 2
switches.
ŏAs a safety measure, a safety mode can be set so that operation is not performed
even if a switch is mistakenly turned on when retracting the landing gear.
Method
NOTE： The trainer function cannot be turned on simultaneously with this
function. If the trainer function is active, “trainer “ACT”” is displayed on the
screen. After setting the trainer function to “INH” , turn on this function.
（Direction Switch）
SW1
SW2
1: R/U
2: L/U
3: R/D
4: L/D
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "SNAP ROLL"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
61$352//
（Snap roll direction）
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used. To use
the function, select OFF(ON).
Rate set
Safe mode set
Direction Switch selection
Airplane
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
Snap roll
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and
then select the "OFF" by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
or
■ Direction switch
selection
② Select the "DIRC-SW1"
and "DIRC-SW2" item
and select each switch
by pressing the + key or
‒ key.
● When you do not use a
function, set to the "INH"
side.
Range：
NULL, SwA 〜 SwH
Default：NULL
＋
−
■ Safe mode set
④ Select the "SAFE-MODE"
item and then select the
mode by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
Range：
FREE, CH5+, CH5Default：FREE
■ Servo Rate set
③ Switch the DIRC-SW1 or DIRCSW2 in the direction you are
wanting to adjust by pressing
the + key or ‒ key at the “AIL” ,
“ELE” , and “RUD” items.
Range：-120 〜 +120%
● Set the R/U, L/U, R/D, and L/D
directions.
● When a 3 position switch was selected at “DIRC-SW1” setting, 1:R/U, 2:L/
U, 3:R/D switching is possible with 1 switch. At this time, “DIRC-SW2”
cannot be selected.
Safe mode setting can set the direction of the landing gear switch.
● When “CH5-” was selected, the safety device sets the landing gear switch to the
rear position and the snap switch is not effective even if operated. When the
landing gear switch is in the forward position, operation is possible. When “CH5+
“ was selected, the safety device operates and the snap switch is ineffective even
if operated. When the landing gear switch is in the rear position, operation is
possible.
● When “FREE” was selected: The safety device does not operate regardless of the
switch direction.
116
THR-CURVE
Throttle curve（Airplane）
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This function sets a 5 point throttle curve so that
the engine/motor speed relative to movement of the
WKURWWOHVWLFNLVWKHRSWLPXPYDOXHIRUÀLJKW
ŏA curve can be set for each switch position.
However, this function cannot be used when the throttle EXP function was set. When this function is set,
the throttle EXP function cannot be used.
Method
Calling the setting screen
② Select "THR-CURVE"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
7+5&859(
Activating the function
Switch selection
● When not using this function,
select INH.
● The set-up curve is shown
5 point curve
set
（Present switch position）
Airplane
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
Throttle curve
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item
and then select the
"ON" by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ Switch selection
② Select the "SW" item
and then select the
switch by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：SwA 〜 SwH、Default：SwE
■ 5 point curve set
③ By Jog key, either of P-1 to P-5 is chosen. The + key or - key is pressed and a
rate is set up.
＋
−
or
Range：0 〜 100%
Default：P-1:0%, P-2:25%, P-3:50%, P-4:75%, P-5:100%
117
Pitch curve（Airplane）
PIT-CURVE
(ACROBATIC)
Function
This function is a function for the variable pitch
propellers of an airplane.
7KHFXUYHRI¿YHSRLQWVFDQEHVHWXS
ŏPIT-curve function cannot be used when an
AIL9ATOR function is ACT.
ŏCH of a pitch can be set to 8CH or 5CH.
Method
Calling the setting screen
② Select "PIT-CURVE"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
3,7&859(
Activating the function
Switch selection
● When not using this function,
select INH.
Channel selection
● The set-up curve is shown
Airplane
5 point curve
set
（Present switch position）
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
PIT-curve
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item
and then select the
"ON" by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ 5 point curve set
③ By Jog key, either of P-1
to P-5 is chosen. The +
key or - key is pressed
and a rate is set up.
＋
−
or
Range：SwA 〜 SwH、Default：SwE
（When a channel is changed）
＋
−
or
Range：-100 〜
+100%
Default：P-1:-100%, P-2:-50%, P-3:0%,
P-4:+50%, P-5:+100%
118
■ Switch selection
② Select the "SW" item
and then select the
switch by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
■ Channel selection
① Select the "CH" item and
then select the channel
by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
Range：8CH、5CH
Default：8CH
−
or
THR DELAY
Throttle delay
(ACROBATIC)
Function
When this function is used, the throttle servo
operating speed can be slowed down.
（Perfect for turbojet engine throttle control, etc.）
ŏThe amount of delay can be set.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "THR DELAY"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
7+5'(/$<
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used. To use
the function, select ACT.
Activating the function
（Throttle delay rate）
● It can be set to slow the servo
movement up to +100%
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
Airplane
Delay Rate set
THR DELAY
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
■ Delay Rate set
② Select the "RATE" item and then adjust
the rate by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：0 〜 100%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
● When you do not use a
function, set to the "INH" side.
119
HELICOPTER Function
The setting screen of each function is called from the following menu. The function when
the model type was set to helicopter is displayed here.
To menu screen
by holding down
the + key
PowerON
● First set the
throttle to slow.
● Then turn on the power.
（Home screen）
● When the END key is
pressed, the display
returns to the home
screen.
END
● When the + key is pressed for
（1 second） 1 second, the menu screen is
displayed.
＋
MENU
0(18岜岜岜岜
0(18岜岜岜岜
MENU
1/3
㌣0'/6(/
㌣0'/1$0(
㌣)$,/6$)(
㌣5(9(56(
㌣7,0(5
㌣6(592
㌣(1'32,17
㌣75,0
㌣68%75,0
㌣30,;
㌣$8;&+$1
㌣3$5$0(7(5
Helicopter
0(18岜岜岜岜
MENU
2/3
㌣7(/(0(75<
㌣6(1625
㌣6%86/,1.
㌣0'/75$16
㌣75$,1(5
㌣&21',7,21
㌣6:$6+$)5
㌣6:+0,;
㌣6:+5,1*
㌣2))6(7
㌣'(/$<
㌣7+5&87
（Selection）
● Move the cursor
(highlighted) up and
down and to the left and
right with the Jog key and
select the function.
The cursor can be moved
over several pages.
0(18岜岜岜岜
MENU
3/3
120
㌣*<526(16
㌣'5(;32
㌣7+5&859(
㌣3,7&859(
㌣5(920,;
㌣7+5+2/'
㌣*29(5125
㌣+297+5
㌣+293,7
㌣+, ‫ ط‬/23,7
㌣7+50,;
㌣7+5‫ڀ‬1(('/
（Calling the setting screen）
● Press the Jog key to open the
setting screen.
key ／ LCD
●＋ key
（Condition switching at each
setting screen）
● Press the jog button for 1 second.
When setting conditions with the
following function, each setting can
be made by switching the condition
by pressing the Jog key for 1 second.
Throttle curve, Pitch curve,
Pitch → Rudder, Gyro sens, HI/
LO-Pitch, OFFSET, Throttle MIX,
THR → Needle, Swash MIX
●− key
●Jog key
●END key
Refer to "Common Functions"
previously described for a
description of this function.
■ Function
MENU1/3
MDL-SEL
MENU2/3
(P.40)
TELEMETRY
MENU3/3
(P.66)
GYRO SENS
Model select ／ Model Copy ／ Data
reset ／ RX ／ Link
Telemetry Display ／ Alarm setup
Gyro mixing
MDL-NAME
SENSOR
D/R, EXPO
Telemetry sensor
(P.43)
Model name ／ User name
FAIL SAFE
(P.45)
Fail safe
REVERSE
(P.47)
Servo reverse
TIMER
(P.48)
Timer
SERVO
SBUS LINK
(P.83)
(P.89)
THR-CURVE
(P.92)
PIT-CURVE
Data transfer of another 10J or 8J
Pitch curve
TRAINER
REVO.MIX
(P.93)
Trainer
Throttlehold)
THR HOLD
(P.122)
(P.50)
SWASH AFR（H-1 removes）
(P.123)
Governor mixing
(P.51)
Swash AFR
Hovering Throttle
SUB TRIM
SWH.MIX
(P.52)
SWH.RING
P.MIX1-6
Swash RING
(P.53)
AUX-CHAN
OFFSET
(P.56)
DELAY
PARAMETER
Delay
(P.58)
Data reset ／ Model type ／ ATLtrim ／ LCD contrast ／ Back light :
mode, time, adjustment ／ Home
display ／ Battery alarm ／ Battery
vibration ／ Buzzer tone ／ Jog
navi ／ Jog light ／ Jog time ／
Telemetry : mode, unit ／ Speech :
language, volume ／ Stick position
alarm
(P.126)
THR.CHT
HOV-PIT
(P.143)
(P.144)
HI/LO-PIT
(P.145)
HI/LO-pitch trim
(P.127)
THR-MIX
(P.146)
Swash → Throttle mixing
Trim offset
AUX channel
HOV-THR
(P.141)
Hovering Pitch
Swash MIXing
Sub trim
Program mixing 1 〜 6
(P.124)
(P.140)
Helicopter
GOVERNOR
END POINT
Trim reset ／ Trim step
(P.138)
Throttlehold
Condition
TRIM
(P.136)
Revolution mixing (PIT to RUD)
Servo monitor ／ Servo test
End point
(P.134)
Throttle curve
CONDITION(Idle-up・
(P.49)
(P.132)
Dual rate ／ EXPO
S.BUS servo set up
MDL-TRANS
(P.131)
(P.128)
THR-NEEDL
(P.147)
Throttle → Needle mixing
(P.129)
Throttle cut
121
CONDITION
Condition select (Idle-up・Throttlehold) (HELICOPTER)
Function
The condition switches (idle up 1/2/3 and throttle
hold switch) are not operative at initial setting.
Switch setting is performed in advance with the
condition select function.
ŏInitially set to idle up 1: SwE (center), idle up 2: SwE
(forward), idle up : SwF (forward), throttle hold:
SwG (forward).
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "CONDITION"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/
Off is shown when active and
assigned to a switch.
&21',7,21
Idle-up
setting
Throttlehold
setting
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
（Activating thefunction） （Switch direction ）
（Switch selection ）
Helicopter
Condition select
■ Activating the function
① Select the "INH" item of the
condition you want to use and set
it to "ON" or "OFF" by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● Set conditions you do not want to use to "INH".
（In the case of change of a switch）
■ Switch selection
② A cursor is moved to ＋
"Switch selection" and
or
a switch is changed by
＋ key or − key.
−
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
Default：SwE（IDLE-UP1/2）、
SwF（IDLE-UP3）、SwG（THR-HOLD）
122
■ Switch direction
③ A cursor is moved to
"Switch direction" and
a switch direction is
changed by ＋ key or −
key.
＋
−
or
Range：
● 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
● 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN,
DOWN
SWASH AFR
Swash AFR
(HELICOPTER)
（When swash type is H-1, this setting screen is not displayed.）
Function
This is the adjustable function rate (AFR) function when HR3, H-3, HE3, HN3, H-2, H-4, or H4X
is selected as the swash type. The ailerons, elevators, and pitch steering angle and direction can be
adjusted.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "SWASH AFR"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
● Depending on the swash type the
screen display is different.
6:$6+$)5
● When the polarity is changed, the
direction of operation is reversed.
Rete
NOTE：If the steering angle is too large, linkage binding may occur .
■ Travel adjustment of each function
① Select each function item of "RATE" and
set the rate by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
Helicopter
Swash AFR
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：+50%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously. However, polarity does not
return.
123
SWH. MIX
Swash mixing
(HELICOPTER)
Function
This mixing is used to correct the bad tendencies
of the swash plate in the aileron direction and
elevator direction relative to aileron, elevator, and
pitch operations. It adjusts the rate of the direction
that requires correction so that the servo operates
smoothly in the proper direction relative to each
operation.
ŏThe correction amount of each condition can be
set.
ŏThe left and right (up and down) correction
amount can be set for each condition.
Example of use: Using to correct bad roll tendencies
① AIL → ELE is set to ON.
② ACTION/ON is common to all conditions. The rate of unused conditions is set to 0%.
③ When the nose drops at right roll and the right side rate is adjusted in the "+"
direction, the elevators move to the up side when the right aileron is deflected.
Left roll can be adjusted by left side rate.
However, since the left and right ailerons polarity and elevators operating direction
relationship is reversed; check the correction direction by swash plate operation.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "SWH.MIX"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
（Present condition）
Helicopter
Condition
Mixing master direction
（Rate）
Mixing rate
6:+0,;
Activating the function
124
6:+0,;
● When not using this function,
select INH.
Swash mixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select the
"ON" by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
■ Setup of rate
② Select the "RATE" item and then adjust the mixing
rate by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
or
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
● When you are not using a function, set
this to INH.
● ON/OFF of a function, Setup of rate, and a trim, Jog key is pushed and
setting condition can be chosen.
Range：
NORM, IDL1, IDL2, IDL3, HOLD
Helicopter
125
SWH.RING
Swash ring
(HELICOPTER)
← ELE operation →
Function
This swash mixing function limits swash travel
to prevent damage to the switch linkage due to simultaneous aileron and elevator operation. If is effective in 3D aerobatics with a large steering angle.
←
● Aileron and elevator stick operation is limited
to within the circle (swash mixing) in the figure
shown at the right. (When rate is 100%)
Method
SwashRing
50%
100%
AIL operation
→
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "SWH.RING"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
6:+5,1*
● When not using this function,
select INH.
Activating the function
Swash Ring rate
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
● Displays the actual aileron
and elevator combined
travel when the stick is
manipulated.
● Adjusts the operable range (swash mixing) of the
aileron and elevator sticks.
Helicopter
Swash Ring
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select the
"ON" by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to
the "INH" side.
■ Setup of rate
② Select the "RATE" item and
then adjust the mixing rate
by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
Range：50 〜 200%
Default：100%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
NOTE：Adjust the swash mixing rate to the largest swash
inclination at which the linkage rod does not interfere.
126
OFFSET
Trim offset
(HELICOPTER)
Function
If this trim offset function is used, independent
trim adjustments can be made during hovering and
in the air. This function can offset the ailerons,
elevators, and rudder neutral position by linking
to the set switch or condition. A habit that tends
to appear from the standpoint of helicopter
characteristics when flying at high speed is
possible. This function can correct this habit.
ŏFor a clockwise rotation rotor, since the helicopter
tilts to the right during Áight, use the offset function
to set the swash plate so that the helicopter tilts
to the left. Since the direction of the elevators is
different depending on adjustment of the aircraft,
decide the setting direction after Áight. :hen the
gyro is used in the A9CS mode at the rudder, etc.,
the offset rate is made 0 (initial setting) to make
corrections at the gyro side.
ŏ:hen the switch was selected 1 offset system can
be set for a 2 position switch and 2 offset systems
can be set for a 3 position switch. Linking to
conditions (IDL1 〜 3, HOLD) is also possible.
ŏ:hen the offset function is on, data adjustment is
possible even by digital trim. The trim adjusted rate
is input in the air. (:hen the offset function is ON,
the initial screen trim display is linked.)
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "OFFSET"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
2))6(7
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/Off is
shown when active and assigned
to a switch.
Activating the function
Switch direction,
Selection of condition
Offset rate
（Present condition ）
Switch selection
Trim offset
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item
and then select the
"ON" or "OFF" by
pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
■ Switch selection
② Select the "SW" item
and then select the
switch by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ Switch direction and condition
selection
③ Select the switch direction and
condition you want to set at the switch
direction and
＋
−
condition items.
or
＋
−
Helicopter
● When "Cond" is chosen,
if Jog key is pushed for
1 second, it will change
to each condition
setting screen.
or
Range：Cond, SwA 〜 SwH
■ Offset rate
④ Select the "RATE" item and then adjust the offset rate
by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
Range：-120 〜 +120%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
127
DELAY
Delay
(HELICOPTER)
Function
This function prevents sudden offset changes
when the offset, pitchĺrudder mixing and condition select (Idle-up・Throttle-hold) functions are
turned on and off.
ŏDelay can be set at the ailerons, elevators, rudder,
throttle, and pitch.
ŏThe set delay is common to the offset,
pitchńrudder mixing, and condition select functions.
ŏThe delay rate is reÁected in common. In other
words, it can t be established different rate by the
respective functions.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "DELAY"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
'(/$<
● Linked to the offset, revolution
mixing, and throttle hold functions
and turned "ON".
Delay rate
● The delay is maximum at 100%.
Helicopter
Servo Speed
Normal
0%
100%
ON
Function ON
Delay rate
■ Delay rate setup
① Select the "RATE" item and then adjust
the delay rate by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
Range：0 〜 100%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
128
More slowly
THR.CUT
Throttle cut
(HELICOPTER)
Function
This function cuts (stops) the engine or motor
by stick operation. At throttle operation, the rate
is adjusted to the position which completely cuts
the throttle servo or ESC when the throttle is
operated. At function operation, this position is
held regardless of the throttle stick position.
ŏNORESC operation mode switching. For motor
aircraft, select ESC. For motor aircraft, the throttle
position when the function is reset can be set so
the motor will not unexpectedly run at high speed
when the throttle cut function is reset. :hen the
throttle stick is higher than the set throttle position,
the throttle cut function is not reset even if the
switch is set to OFF. Set to a safe throttle position
(slow side).
ŏFunction operation can be selected from among
switches A 〜 H.
ŏSet the throttle cut function for safety also.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "THR.CUT"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
7+5&87
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
● Adjusts the rate to the position
that completely cuts the
throttle servo or ESC.
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the selected switch.
○ 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
○ 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN, DOWN
● The "THR" item can be set
when the operation mode
is "ESC". The number in
parentheses is the current
throttle stick position.
Helicopter
Mode
Activating the function
Cut Position rate
Throttle Position
Switch selection
Switch direction
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/
Off is shown when active and
assigned to a switch.
129
Throttle Cut
■ Mode
① Select the "MODE" item and then select the
mode by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
■ Activating the function
② Select the "MIX" item and then select the off
by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
−
or
or
Range：NOR, ESC
Default：NOR
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
● "NOR"：Engine plane
"ESC"：Electric motor plane
■ Switch selection
③ Select the "SW" item and then select
the switch by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
■ Switch direction
④ Select the "POSI" by pressing the + key or ‒ key at
the ON direction selection item.
＋
−
or
or
Range：
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
Default：SwA
■ Cut Position rate
⑤ Select the "RATE" item and then select
the cht position by pressing the + key or
‒ key (motor stop).
＋
−
（In the case of ESC ）
■ Function release Throttle Position
⑥ Select the "THR" item and then select the release
position by THR stick is lowered and Jog key is
pressed for 1 second.
Helicopter
or
● It adjusts to the position where an engine
is cut.
Range：-30 〜 0 〜 +30%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value
to the initial value, press the + key and ‒
key simultaneously.
130
● 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
● 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR,
C&DN, DOWN
● Set to a safe low throttle position.
Range：0 〜 100%
Default：15%
GYRO SENS
Gyro mixing
(HELICOPTER)
（For helicopters Gyro mixing）
Function
ŏ:hen the GY mode was selected, "A9C" or "NOR"
is displayed at the sensitivity setting value.
ŏThe sensitivity setting channel can be selected
from the RUD (CH5), RUDAIL(CH5CH7), RUD
ELE (CH5CH8) or RUDAILELE (CH5CH7CH8)
combinations.
This mixing adjusts the gyro sensitivity from the
transmitter. The AVCS gyro (GY mode) or normal
gyro (STD mode) can be selected. Up to 3 axes can
be set.
ŏThe sensitivity can be linked to the condition (Cond)
or an arbitrary switch and set.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "GYRO SENS"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
Gain channel selection
Switch direction
● When not using this function,
select INH.
*<526(16
Gain switch direction
（Present switch position）
Gyro type,
Gain rate
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
（Gyro type）
（Gyro Gain set）
● Swit c h e s t o t h e
sensitivity setting
screen of each
switch direction
when the Jog key is pressed.
● When a Futaba GY gyro is used, gyro type "GY" is selected. This switches the gyro sensitivity
setting item to the mode and sensitivity direct reading display.
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item
and then select the
"ON" by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
＋
■ Gain switch selection
② Select the "SW" item
and then select the
switch by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ Gain channel selection
③ Select the ＋
−
"CH" item and
or
then select
the sensitivity
setting channel by pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
Range：RUD, RUD/AIL,
RUD/ELE, RUD/AIL/ELE
Default：RUD
＋
−
or
Helicopter
Gyro setup
Range：Cond, SwA 〜 SwH
■ Gyro type and sensitivity setting
④ Press the Jog key and select the sensitivity setting
screen you want to set and then set "type" (gyro
type) and "rate" (gyro sensitivity) of each channel by
pressing the +key or ‒ key.
（"type"）Range：STD,GY Default：STD
（"rate"）Range：0 〜 100%（STD）, NOR100 〜 0 〜
AVC100%（GY） Default：50%
（STD）, 0%
（GY）
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
131
D/R,EXPO
Dual rate ／ EXPO
(HELICOPTER)
Function
D/R
The aileron, elevator and rudder channel control surface angle can be switched in 2 steps
ŏThe control surface angle is adjusted by each direction of the switch or condition. The left and
right (up and down) direction of each switch can be set individually.
EXP
This function makes operation more pleasant by changing the operating curve so that servo movement
is sluggish or sensitive relative to stick operation near the aileron, elevator, throttle, and rudder neutral
position. Adjustments can be made in 2 steps according to the control surface angle.
ŏThe "-" side makes servo movement sluggish and the "" side makes servo movement sensitive near the
neutral position. Exponential is applied to entire throttle servo travel. :hen the "" side is increased, the
slow side becomes sluggish and the high side becomes sensitive.
ŏSetting corresponding to each rate of dual rate (DR) is possible. (Except throttle) The direction of each
switch and the left and right (up and down) direction of each channel can be set individually.
Switch selection（SW）
Switches A to H can be selected as the aileron channel, elevator channel, and rudder channel dual rate
(exponential) switch.
ŏSelect：Switch 〜 SwitchH ／ condition：Cond
ŏDefault：Aileron：SwitchD ／ Elevator：SwitchA ／ Rudder：SwitchB
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "D/R,EXPO"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Helicopter
● The channel under selection is
underlined.
Channel selection
Switch direction
（present switch position ）
Dual rate
EXPO
● The dual rate and exponential
settings are displayed by a
curve.
Switch selection
● Channel selection/Select
the setting item with the
Jog key.
● Jog key is pushed for 1
second, a condition screen
will change.
132
（Switch number）
（Rate）
＜ Channel ＞
1：Aileron
2：Elevator
4：Rudder
Dual rate
■ Channel selection
① A channel is chosen
by Jog key.
■ Switch direction
② Select the "No" item and
then select the switch
direction or condition by
pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
Range：1, 2, 4
■ D/R Setup of rate
③ Select each function item of "D/R" and
set the rate by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
−
or
Range：0 〜 140% Default：100%
● When you want to return the set value
to the initial value, press the + key and ‒
key simultaneously.
Adjust the rate of each direction of the dual rate switch and stick by repeating step
● Moving to another setting item of the same
channel is possible by Jog key.
EXPO
■ Channel selection
① A channel is chosen
by Jog key.
■ Switch direction
② Select the "No" item and
then select the switch
direction or condition by
pressing the + key or ‒
key.
Range：1, 2, 4
＋
■ EXP Setup of rate
③ Select the "EXP" item and then adjust
the rate by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
−
Range：-100 〜 +100%、Default：0%
or
● When you want to return the set value
to the initial value, press the + key and ‒
key simultaneously.
Adjust the rate of each direction of the dual rate switch and stick by repeating step
Switch Change
■ Channel selection
① Select the "SW" item and then select
the channel with the Jog key.
■ Switch selection
② A switch or Cond is chosen by + key or
‒ key.
＋
Helicopter
● Moving to another setting item of the same
channel is possible by Jog key.
−
or
Range：1, 2, 4
Range：SwA 〜 SwH, Cond
● When "Cond" is chosen, a setup is
possible for every condition.
133
THR-CURVE
Throttle curve（For helicopters ）
(HELICOPTER)
Function
ŏNormal (NOR), idle up 1 (IDL1), idle up 2 (IDL2), and
idle up 3 (IDL3) throttle curves can be set.
ŏThe normal (NOR), idle up 1 (IDL1), idle up 2 (IDL2),
and idle up 3 (IDL3) switch can be pre-set at the
condition selection screen.
The throttle curve function sets a 5 point curve in
relation to the throttle stick movement and adjusts
each point over the 0 〜 100% range so that the
HQJLQHVSHHGLVRSWLPXPIRUÀLJKW
（Normal throttle curve adjustment method）
The normal throttle curve creates a basic throttle curve centered near hovering. This curve is
adjusted together with the normal pitch curve so that engine speed is constant and up/down
control is easiest. The normal throttle function is always on.
（Idle up 1/2/3 throttle curve adjustment method）
The idle up curves are set so that the engine maintains a constant speed even when the pitch is
reduced during flight. Curves matched to the purpose such as loop, roll and 3D are created and idle
up curves 1/2/3 are by aerobatics.
CAUTIONS
［Operation precautions］When starting the engine, always set idle up
sticks 1/2/3 to OFF and start the engine at idling.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "THR-CURVE"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Helicopter
Activating the function
Setting condition
7+5&859(
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/
Off is shown when active
and assigned to a switch. A
display when normal is "---"
（alwaysON）.
5point curve
rate
● The THR-CURVE settings are
displayed by a curve.
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
（Rate）
134
（Present condition）
Throttle curve
■ Activating the throttle curves (ID1/2/3)
① Select the "MIX" item and set to ＋
"ON" or "OFF" by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
−
or
● For the normal condition, "---" is displayed. (Always ON)
Range：NOR, ID1, ID2, ID3
● When you do not want to use an idle up curve, set to
"INH".
■ 5 point curve setting
② Select the setting item of each point (P-1 〜 P-5)
with the Jog key and set the travel of each point by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
Default：
P-5: 100%
P-4: 75%
P-3: 50%
P-2: 25%
P-1: 0%
Range：0 〜 100%
or
● When you want to return the set value to
the initial value, press the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
■ Curve copying method
① Select the "CND" item
and switch to the curve
copy mode by pressing
the Jog key.
② Press the + key or ‒
key and select the copy
destination condition.
＋
③ Copy the condition by
pressing the Jog key for
1 second.
−
（1 second）
or
● Throttle curve setting examples
50
25
0
P1
50
P3
P4
STICK
（Normal）
P5
0
P1
P5=100.0%
P4= 75.0%
P3= 65.0%
P2= 65.0%
P1= 67.0%
75
50
25
25
P2
（The example of a setting ）
%
100
P5=100.0%
P4= 75.0%
P3= 50.0%
P2= 54.0%
P1= 56.0%
75
RATE
RATE
75
（The example of a setting ）
%
100
P2
P3
P4
P5
0
P1
P2
STICK
（Idle-up1）
P3
P4
P5
Helicopter
P5=100.0%
P4= 65.0%
P3= 50.0%
P2= 30.0%
P1= 0.0%
RATE
（The example of a setting ）
%
100
STICK
（Idle-up2）
NOTE：Set the actual value of the throttle curve according to the fuselage
specifications.
135
PIT-CURVE
Pitch curve（For helicopters ）
(HELICOPTER)
Function
The pitch curve function allows setting by a 5
point curve in relation to throttle stick movement
and adjustment of each point over the -100% 〜
+100% range so that the pitch enters the optimum
ÀLJKWVWDWH
ŏNormal (NOR), idle up 1 (IDL1), idle up 2 (IDL2), idle
up 3 (IDL3), and hold (HLD) pitch curves can be
set.
ŏThe normal (NOR), idle up 1 (IDL1), idle up 2 (IDL2),
idle up 3 (DL3), and hold (HOLD) switches can be
pre-set at the conditions selection screen.
NOTE：When the hold switch is on, the hold function has
priority even though an idle up switch is in any position.
（Normal curve adjustment method）
The normal pitch curve creates a basic pitch curve centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted
together with the throttle pitch curve so that engine speed is constant and up/down control is
easiest.
（Idle up 1/2/3 curve adjustment method）
The high side pitch curve sets the maximum pitch that does not apply a load to the engine. The low
side pitch curve is created to match the purpose such as loop, roll, and 3D. The idle up 1/2/3 curves
are used by aerobatics.
（Throttle hold curve adjustment method）
The throttle hold curve is used when performing auto rotation dives. Set the intermediate pitch to
match the stick work at pitch up.
Method
Calling the setting screen
Helicopter
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "PIT-CURVE"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
Condition
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/
Off is shown when active and
assigned to a switch. When
normal,"---" (always ON) is
displayed.
3,7&859(
5point curve
rate
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
● The PIT-CURVE settings are
displayed by a curve.
（Rate）
136
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
（Present condition）
Pitch curve
■ Activating the pitch curves
（ID1/2/3, HLD）
① Select the "MIX" item and then ＋
select the "ON" or "OFF" by
or
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
● For the normal condition, "---" is displayed. (Always ON)
Range：NOR, ID1, ID2, ID3, HLD
● When you do not want to use an idle up, hold curve, set
to "INH".
Default：
P-5: +100%
P-4: +50%
P-3: 0%
P-2: -50%
P-1: -100%
■ 5 point curve setting
② Select the setting item of each point (P-1 〜 P-5)
with the Jog key and set the travel of each point by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
Range：-100 〜 +100%
or
● When you want to return the set value to
the initial value, press the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
■ Curve copying method
① Select the "CND" item
and switch to the curve
copy mode by pressing
the Jog key.
② Press the + key or ‒
key and select the copy
destination condition.
＋
③ Copy the condition by
pressing the Jog key for
1 second.
−
（1 second）
or
● Pitch curve setting examples
0
-50
-100
P1
P5= +40%
P4= +10%
P3= -10%
P2= -40%
P1= -70%
0
P2
P3
P4
-100
P1
P5
（Normal）
P2
P3
STICK
P4
（Idle-up1）
（The example of a setting ）
%
+100
+50
+50
P5= +40%
P4= +10%
P3= -10%
P2= -50%
P1= -80%
0
-50
-50
STICK
RATE
+50
RATE
P5= +70%
P4= +50%
P3= +6%
P2= -40%
P1= -70%
（The example of a setting ）
%
+100
P5
-100
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
STICK
Helicopter
RATE
+50
（The example of a setting ）
%
+100
RATE
（The example of a setting ）
%
+100
（Idle-up2）
NOTE：Set the actual value of the pitch curve according to
the fuselage specifications.
P5= +100%
P4= +50%
P3=
0%
P2= -50%
P1= -100%
0
-50
-100
P1
P2
P3
STICK
P4
P5
（Hold）
137
REVO.MIX
Pitch → Rudder mixing
(HELICOPTER)
Function
7KH SLWFKĺUXGGHU PL[LQJ IXQFWLRQ FRQWUROV
the pitch of the tail rotor to suppress the reaction
torque (force that attempts to swing the helicopter
in the direction opposite the direction of rotation
of the main rotor) generated by the main rotor
pitch and speed. It is adjusted so that the pitch of
the tail rotor is also changed when the main rotor
pitch changes and reaction torque appears and so
that the nose does not swing to the left and right.
However, when the AVCS mode is used with a GY
6HULHVJ\URSLWFKĺUXGGHUPL[LQJLVXQQHFHVVDU\
ŏThe normal (NOR) idle up 12 (IDL1,2), and idle up 3
(IDL3) rates can be set.
ŏThe high side and low side rates can be adjusted.
ŏFor a clockwise rotation rotor, the operating
direction is set so that the rudder is mixed in the
right direction when the pitch becomes plus. For
a counterclockwise rotation rotor, the setting is
opposite. The operating direction setting reverses
the rate polarity.
C: rotation: Low side (LO:) -105, high side (HIGH)
10
CC: rotation: Low side (LO:) 10, high side
(HIGH) -10
*The above values are the initial values. Replace
them with the actual setting values.
Adjustment procedure
First, trim at hovering and then adjust the neutral position.
（Normal pitch → rudder mixing）
Helicopter
● Throttle low side (slow while hovering) adjustment
Repeatedly hover from take off and land from hovering at a constant rate matched to your own rhythm, and
adjust pitch → rudder mixing so that the nose does not deflect when the throttle is raised and lowered.
If the nose points to the left when landing from hovering or points to the right when taking off, when hovering
stabilizes and the stick moves to the neutral position, low side mixing rate is probably too large and when
the nose points in the opposite direction, low side rate is probably too small. However, when landing, the
direction of the nose may not stabilize depending on the state on the ground. The direction of the nose may
also become unstable when rotation of the rotor does not rise.
● Throttle high (up to climbing from hovering and diving hovering) adjustment
Repeat up to climbing from hovering and diving hovering matched to your own rhythm and adjust
pitch → rudder mixing so that the nose does not deflect to the left and right when the throttle is raised and
lowered. If the nose points to the right when climbing from hovering, the high side mixing rate is too large and
if the nose points to the right, the mixing rate is too small. Repeat climbing and diving and make adjustment
while taking the balance.
（idle-up1/2,3Pitch → Ruddermixing）
This mixing sets the mixing rate so that the rudder direction is straight forward at high speed flight.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
＋ （1 second）
138
② Select "REVO.MIX"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
Activating the function
Selection of condition
High side Setup of rate
Low side Setup of rate
5(920,;
● When not using this function,
select INH.
（present switch position ）
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
（Rate）
Pitch → Ruddermixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" ＋
item and then
select the "ON" by
pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
■ Selection of condition
② Select the "CND" item and
selection of condition by
pressing the + key or ‒
key.
−
or
−
or
Range：NORM, IDL1/2, IDL3
● When you do not use a function, set to
the "INH" side.
■ Setup of rate
③ Select each function item of "HI"or
"LO" and set the rate by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
＋
＋
−
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default(NORM)：-20%(LOW)、+20%(HIGH)
Default(IDL1/2/3)：0%(LOW)、0%(HIGH)
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
Helicopter
139
THR HOLD
Throttle hold
(HELICOPTER)
Function
The throttle hold function fixes or stops the
engine throttle position by hold switch operation
during an auto rotation dive. Operation can be
set within the -50% 〜 +50% range based on the
throttle trim position.
The switch is changed at the conditions selection
screen. (Initial setting: SwG)
CAUTIONS
［NOTE］Priority is given to throttlehold over idle-up.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "THR HOLD"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
7+5+2/'
Activating the function
● When not using this Function
select INH. The display of On/
Off is shown when active and
assigned to a switch.
hold throttle position
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
Throttle hold
Helicopter
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ON" or "OFF" by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
■ Hold throttle position
② Select the "RATE" item and then adjust
the rate by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-50 〜 +50%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
● When you do not use a
function, set to the "INH" side.
● Function ACT ↔ INH is linked to 【Hold position adjustment method】
condition THR-HOLD, and can be set ● When you want to lower the engine idling, set to the "+" direction and
at any screen.
adjust so that the carburetor is full open.
● When maintaining idling, set the throttle stick to the slow position and
turn the hold switch on and off and set to the number at which the servo
does not operate.
NOTE：When connecting the throttle linkage, lower the digital trim to the
slowest and adjust so that the carburetor is full open.
140
GOVERNOR
Governor mixing
(HELICOPTER)
Function
When a governor (CGY750/GY701/GV-1,
etc.) is used, the speed can be adjusted from the
transmitter. CH7 or CH8 or CH9 can be selected as
the speed setting control channel.
When using a separate ON/OFF switch (cut
switch), ON/OFF control uses CH8. In this case,
CH7 or CH9 controls speed setting.
Setting examples：
● Example of setting that switches the speed and ON/OFF by 3 position switch
3position
Adjustment from transmitter
Switch
Setup of rate
direction
R.P.M 1：OFF
UP
0%
0%（Governor R.P.M "off"）
R.P.M 2：1400
CNTR
50%
"50%"
R.P.M 3：1700
DOWN
100%
"100%"
*For example, speed 3 sets *For the time being use the *Since speed adjustment from the transmitter
is rate setting, checking the actual speed at
the maximum speed to be initial rate setting.
the governor display and remembering its
used and is lowered and
relationship is convenient.
adjusted at the transmitter.
Governor speed
（setting example）
● Switching the speed for each condition
The speed for each condition can be set by selecting "Cond" by switch. Since speed adjustment from the
transmitter is rate setting, for the actual speed check the governor display.
● Controlling governor ON/OFF by separate switch
When a separate switch is used to turn the governor on and off, switch setting is performed by "OFF-CNTRL"
item.
*Speed and ON/OFF switch settings are different depending on the governor. Perform these settings in
accordance with the instruction manual of the governor used.
*At throttle hold, always confirm that the governor is OFF. Conversely, when raising the speed value, reverse
the polarity of "CH8".
Method
Calling the setting screen
② Select "GOVERNOR"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
Switch selection
*29(5125
● When "INH", the function
cannot be used. When you
want to use CH7 as the speed
setting channel, select "CH7"
and when you want to use
CH8(9), select "CH8(9)".
Setup of rate
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
Helicopter
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
（Rate）
● The above screen shows the case when the speed is
set for each condition.
141
Governor mixing
■ Activating the function（R.P.M CH
selection）
① Select the "MIX" item ＋
and then select the
or
"CH7""CH8" or "CH9" by
pressing the + key or ‒
key.
■ Switch selection
② Select the "MODE"
item and then select
the switch by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
−
or
Range：Cond, SwA 〜 SwH
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ R.P.M setting
③ Select the "RATE" item
and then adjust the rate
by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
Range：0.0 〜 100.0%
−
or
Default：
（Cond）
NORM=0.0%, IDL1=50.0%, IDL2=100.0%,
IDL3=100.0%, HOLD=0.0%
（2P Switch selection ）
UP=0.0%, DOWN=100.0%
（3P Switch selection）
UP=0.0%, CNTR=50.0%, DOWN=100.0%
（When using an ON/OFF switch）
*Select the OFF-CTRL item and then adjust the rate by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
■ ON/OFF Switch selection
■ Switch direction
＋
② Select the "POSI" by pressing
① Select the "SW" ＋
−
or
the + key or ‒ key at the ON
item and then
or
direction selection item.
select the switch
by pressing the
● 2P SW：UP, DOWN
+ key or ‒ key.
● 3P SW：UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN, DOWN
−
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
Default：SwA
Helicopter
（When number of rotations goes up at the time of Throttlehold ）
*If the speed is increased at throttle hold, the governor and transmitter operating directions will not
coincide. In this case, match the operating directions by reversing the polarity of "CH8".
What is a governor ？
A governor is made up of a set of sensors which
read the RPM of the helicopterʼ s head, and a
control unit that automatically adjusts the throttle
setting to maintain a constant head speed
regardless of changes in pitch of blades, weather
conditions, etc. Governors are extremely popular in
competition helicopters due to the consistency
provided.
How does it help in helicopter setup? The
governor eliminates the need to spend large
amounts of time setting up throttle curves, as it
automatically adjusts the engineʼ s RPM to
maintain the desired head speed.
142
HOV-THR
Hovering throttle
(HELICOPTER)
Function
The hovering throttle function trims the throttle
near the hovering point.
When the hovering throttle knob is turned
clockwise, the speed increases and when it is turned
counterclockwise, the speed decreases. Rotor
speed changes due to changes in the temperature,
humidity, and other flying conditions can be
trimmed. Adjust for the most stable rotor speed.
More precise trimming is possible by using this
function together with the hovering pitch function.
ŏThe operation condition can be selected from only
normal or normalidle up 1.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "HOV-THR"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
● When "INH", the function
cannot be used. To use the
function, switch to "ON".
+297+5
Trim memory settting
（Compensation amount at trim
memory）
VR setting
Selection of condition
（Actual compensation amount
including the hovering throttle
knob）
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
● NORM：Only the normal condition operates
● NORM/IDL1：It operates by normal condition and
idle-up1.
● The knob operating direction
is different depending on the
polarity.
Hovering Throttle
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to
the "INH" side.
■ VR setting
③ Select the "VR" item and then select the
"VR" or "DT" by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
Range：NULL
（OFF）
, +VR, -VR, +DT5, -DT5,
+DT6, -DT6
Default：+DT6
■ Selection of condition
② Select the "MODE" item
and then select condition
by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
Range：NORM, NORM/IDL1
Default：NORM
Helicopter
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" ＋
item and then
select the "ON" by
pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
（Memorizing the hovering throttle adjustment position）
■ Memory setting
④ Select the "RATE" item and memorize the
current trim position by pressing the Jog
key.
● When the knob is returned to the center after
memorization, the trim position returns to its
previous position.
［NOTE］If memorization is repeated at the same
position, the value is cumulated.
143
HOV-PIT
Hovering pitch
(HELICOPTER)
Function
The hovering pitch function trims the pitch near
the hovering point.
When the hovering pitch knob is turned
clockwise, the pitch gets stronger and when it is
turned counterclockwise, the pitch gets weaker.
Rotor speed changes due to changes in temperature,
humidity, and other flying conditions can be
trimmed. Adjust for the most stable rotor rotation.
Method
More precise trimming is possible by using
this function together with the hovering throttle
function.
ŏThe operating condition can be selected from
normal only and normalidle up 1.
ŏThe trim position can be memori]ed. If it is
memori]ed before the model memory is changed,
the original trim state can be retrieved by merely
setting the knob to the center when the trim
position is recalled.
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "HOV-PIT"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
Trim memory settting
（Compensation amount at trim
memory）
VR setting
Selection of condition
（Actual compensation amount
including the hovering pitch
knob）
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
● NORM：Only the normal condition operates
● NORM/IDL1：It operates by normal condition and
idle-up1.
● The knob operating direction
is different depending on the
polarity
Helicopter
Hovering Pitch
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" ＋
item and then
select the "ON" by
pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to
the "INH" side.
■ VR setting
③ Select the "VR" item
and then select the
"VR" or "DT" by
pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：NULL
（OFF）
, +VR, -VR, +DT5, -DT5,
+DT6, -DT6
Default：-VR
144
● When "INH", the function
cannot be used. To use the
function, switch to "ON".
+293,7
■ Selection of condition
② Select the "MODE" item
and then select condition
by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
Range：NORM, NORM/IDL1
Default：NORM
（Memorizing the hovering pitch adjustment position）
■ Memory setting
④ Select the "RATE" item and memorize the current
trim position by pressing the Jog key.
● When the knob is returned to the center after
memorization, the trim position returns to its
previous position.
［NOTE］If memorization is repeated at the same
position, the value is cumulated.
HI/LO-PIT
HI/LO-pitch trim
(HELICOPTER)
Function
The high/low pitch trim function adjusts the
pitch servo high side and low side to the optimum
SLWFKLQGLYLGXDOO\IRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ QRUPDO
idle up 1/2/3, hold).
ŏThe high pitch and low pitch trim levers and
operating direction can be selected. The trim
levers operate in common for each condition and
a usedo not use trim lever can be selected for
each function.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "HI/LO-PIT"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Selection of condition
+,/23,7
High side Pitch
Trim ON,OFF
High side trim
（Present condition ）
（Actual adjustment position
including high pitch trim）
（Low side same）
● Selected from among DT5,
DT6, and VR. The operation
direction is different
depending on the polarity (+,
-).
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
HI/LO-pitch trim
−
or
■ Adjustment by Key operation
④ Select each function item of "HI-PIT" or "LO-PIT" and
set the pitch rate by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
Range：60 〜 100%
Default：100%
Helicopter
■ Selection of condition
① Select the setting ＋
condition selection
item and select
the condition by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
■ DT, VR adjustment ON, OFF selection
② Select ON, OFF by pressing the + key or
‒ key at the high side or low side "ADJ"
item.
■ TYP selection
③ Select trim or VR by pressing the + key or ‒
key at the "TYP" item.
Range：+DT5, -DT5, +DT6,
-DT6,+VR, -VR
● The high side or low side pitch can be
adjusted with the selected digital trim or
VR.
145
THR-MIX
Throttle mixing
(HELICOPTER)
Function
This mixing compensates for slowing of the
helicopter when the ailerons, elevators, and rudder
are operated.
ŏThe correction amount limits the throttle hold point
5 (or highest point) operation.
ŏThe compensation amount can be set for each
condition.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "THR-MIX"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
7+50,;
● When not using this function,
select INH.
Activating the function
Condition
（Present condition）
Mixing
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
（Rate）
Helicopter
Throttle mixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select the
"ON" by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set to
the "INH" side.
■ Setup of rate
② Select each function item
of "MIX" and set the rate by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：0 〜 100%
（RUD → THR : -100 〜 +100%）
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
● The setting condition can be selected by pressing
the Jog key at rate adjustment.
Range：NORM, IDL1, IDL2, IDL3
146
THR → NEEDL
Throttle → Needlemixing（For helicopters ） (HELICOPTER)
Function
This mixing sets the mixture by a 5 point curve in relation to throttle
stick movement when the engine is equipped with a mixture control
system (needle control or other mixture adjustment). Normal condition
(NOR) idle up use (ID2) and idle up 3 (ID3) can be set independently.
The needle servo connects to CH8 of the transmitter.
8CH
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "THR → NEEDL"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
Condition
7+5 ‫ ڀ‬1(('/
● When not using this function,
select INH.
（Present condition）
5 point curve
set
● The CURVE settings are
displayed by a curve.
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
Throttle → Needlemixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ON" by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
＋
−
● When such, setting condition can be
chosen by pressing Jog key.
or
Range：NOR, I12, ID3
■ 5 point curve setting
② Select the setting item of each
point (P-1 〜 P-5) with the Jog
key and set the travel of each
point by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
Helicopter
● When you do not use a function, set to the "INH" side.
Default：
P-5: 100.0%
P-4: 75.0%
P-3: 50.0%
P-2: 25.0%
P-1: 0.0%
−
or
● When you want to return the set value
to the initial value, press the + key
and ‒ key simultaneously.
Range：0.0 〜 100.0%
■ Curve copying method
① Select the "CND" item and
switch to the curve copy
mode by pressing the Jog
key.
② Press the + key or ‒ key and
select the copy destination
condition.
＋
−
③ Copy the condition by
pressing the Jog key for 1
second.
（1 second）
or
147
Glider function
The setting screen of each function is called from the following menu. The function when
the model type was set to glider (2AIL+4FLP) is displayed here.
Power ON
● First set the
throttle to slow.
● Then turn on
the power.
● W hen t h e E N D k e y i s
pressed, the display
returns to the home
screen.
To menu screen
by holding down
the + key
（Home screen）
$)
＋
END
（1 second） ● When the + key is pressed for
1 second, the menu screen is
displayed.
MENU
0(18岜岜岜岜$)
0(18岜岜岜岜$)
MENU
1/3
㌣0'/6(/
㌣0'/1$0(
㌣)$,/6$)(
㌣5(9(56(
㌣7,0(5
㌣6(592
㌣(1'32,17
㌣75,0
㌣68%75,0
㌣30,;
㌣$8;&+$1
㌣3$5$0(7(5
0(18岜岜岜岜$)
Glider
MENU
2/3
㌣7(/(0(75<
㌣6(1625
㌣6%86/,1.
㌣0'/75$16
㌣75$,1(5
㌣$,/',))
㌣$,/‫ڀ‬58'
㌣97$,/
㌣*<526(16
0(18岜岜岜岜$)
MENU
3/3
148
㌣'5(;32
㌣02725
㌣&21',7,21
㌣58'‫ڀ‬$,/
㌣&$0%5岜)/3
㌣&$0%5岜0,;
㌣%877(5)/<
㌣&$0%5‫(ڀ‬/(
㌣(/(‫&ڀ‬$0%5
㌣$,/‫&ڀ‬$0%5
㌣$,/‫ڀ‬%5.)/
㌣75,00,;
（Selection）
● Move the cursor
( h i g h l i g ht e d ) u p a n d
down and to the left and
right with the Jog key and
select the function.
The cursor can be moved
over several pages.
（Calling the setting screen）
ƔPress the Jog key to open the
setting screen.
Key ／ LCD
●＋ key
●− key
$)
●Jog key
●END key
■ The menu item is an example of WING type 2 ailerons + 4 flaps. The menu items
can be changed according to the WING type. For example, if WING type is 1AIL,
since the item blinks, reference only the item of the WING type used.
Relevant WING type display → WING TYPE
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
Refer to "Common Functions"
previously described for a
description of this function.
■ Function
MENU1/3
MDL-SEL
MENU 3/3
MENU2/3
(P.40)
TELEMETRY
(P.66)
D/R, EXPO
Model select ／ Model Copy ／ Data
reset ／ RX ／ Link
Telemetry Display ／ Alarm setup
Dual rate ／ EXPO
MDL-NAME
SENSOR
MOTOR SW
Telemetry sensor
(P.43)
Model name ／ User name
FAIL SAFE
(P.45)
Fail safe
REVERSE
(P.47)
Servo reverse
TIMER
(P.48)
Timer
SERVO
SBUS LINK
MDL-TRANS
TRIM
Trim reset ／ Trim step
(P.150)
CAMBR MIX
(P.160)
Camber mixing
(P.151)
BUTTERFLY
(P.161)
Butterfly mixing
(P.152)
CAMBR → ELE
(P.162)
Camber → Elevator mixing
V-Tail
Gyro mixing
(P.159)
Camber flap mixing
Aileron Differential
GYRO SENS
(P.52)
(P.93)
(P.158)
(P.153)
ELE → CAMBR
(P.163)
Elevator → Camber mixing
Sub trim
AIL → CAMBR
P.MIX1-6
Aileron → Camber mixing
(P.53)
Program mixing 1 〜 6
AUX-CHAN
AIL → BRKFL
(P.56)
(P.166)
Aileron → Brake flap
AUX channel
TRIM MIX
PARAMETER
Trim MIX
(P.58)
(P.165)
Glider
SUB TRIM
RUD → AIL
CAMBR FLP
V-TAIL
(P.51)
(P.92)
Trainer
END POINT
(P.157)
Condition
TRAINER
Aileron → Rudder
(P.50)
CONDITION
Rudder → Aileron mixing
AIL → RUD
End point
(P.89)
Data transfer of another 10J or 8J
Servo monitor ／ Servo test
(P.156)
Motor switch
S.BUS servo set up
AIL-DIFF
(P.49)
(P.83)
(P.154)
(P.167)
Data reset ／ Model type ／ ATLtrim ／ LCD contrast ／ Back light :
mode, time, adjustment ／ Home
display ／ Battery alarm ／ Battery
vibration ／ Buzzer tone ／ Jog
navi ／ Jog light ／ Jog time ／
Telemetry : mode, unit ／ Speech :
language, volume ／ Stick position
alarm
149
AIL-DIFF
Aileron differential
WING TYPE
Function
(GLIDER)
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
Two servos can be used for ailerons and a
differential can be applied to left and right
aileron operation.
Connect the left aileron to CH1 (AIL) and the
right aileron to CH7.
CH1
ŏThe up and down angle of the left and right aileron
control surface can be adjusted individually.
CH7
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "AIL-DIFF"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
$,/',))
（Aileron rate）
Aileron1
（CH1）
rate
Aileron2
（CH7）rate
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
Aileron Differential
Glider
■ Aileron control surface angle adjustment
① Select the "RATE-AIL1" item and then move the aileron stick
to the left and right and adjust the travel of each by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
Range：-120 〜 +120%
Default：+100%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously. However, polarity does not
return.
（Adjust the RATE-AIL2 item the same as ① .）
150
L：Aileron Stick Left side rate
R：Aileron Stick Right side rate
AIL → RUD
Aileron → Rudder
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
Use this mix when you want to mix the rudder
with aileron operation. This allows the aircraft to
bank at a steep angle.
ŏ:hen the mixing direction is reversed by the
linkage, adjustments can be made by changing
the rate polarity.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "AIL → RUD"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
崐嵓嵕嵛‫ڀ‬嵑崨嵤
$,/
‫ ڀ‬58'
Activating the function
Rate adjustment
● When not using this function,
select INH.
0,;㌣,1+
5$7(㌣ 1250
6:㌣6:$
326,㌣'2:1
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
3 Position Switch
NULL
ON
UP
ON
UP&DWN
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
2 Position Switch
NULL
UP
UP&CNT
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
CENTER
OFF
ON
OFF
CNT&DN
OFF
ON
ON
DOWN
OFF
● When condition was used, the display
can be switched and each connection
can be set by switching the condition
switch.
● The ON/OFF switch can be changed.
(Selected with the Jog key and
changed with the +key)
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the
selected switch.
OFF
ON
DOWN
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select
the "ON" by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
■ Mixing rate
② S e l e c t t h e " R AT E " i t em a n d
then adjust the mixing rate by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
● When you do not use a function, set
to the "INH" side.
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.However,
polarity does not return.
Glider
Aileron → Rudder
151
V-TAIL
V-Tail
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
This mixing is used with V tail aircraft that
combine the elevator and rudder functions.
Ｖ-tail
CH2 (CH4)
Elevator
Rudder
Method
CH4 (CH2)
CH2 Servo
ELE1
RUD2
CH4 Servo
ELE2
RUD1
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "V-TAIL"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
97$,/
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used. To use
the function, select ACT.
ELE1 rate
ELE2 rate
（Rate adjustment）
RUD2 rate
RUD1 rate
● Select the setting item with
the Jog key.
V-TAIL
Glider
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then
select the "ACT" by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a
function, set to the "INH" side.
■ Rate adjustment
② Select the "RATE" item and then adjust
the mixing rate by pressing the + key or
‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：+50%
（only ELE2 : -50%）
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.However, polarity does not
return.
NOTE：We recommend that setting be performed while moving the stick and checking the amount of movement. If
the amount of movement is too large, elevator and rudder operation will be compounded and the servo travel range
will be exceeded and a dead band in which the servo will not operate may be created.
152
GYRO SENS
Gyro sensor
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
flight, the gyro will lose control of the plane·s
attitude. From the standpoint of safety, we
recommend that the OFF (0) position also be set
using a 3 position switch.
ŏCH5, CH5CH7, CH5CH8 or CH5CH7CH8
combinations can be selected as the sensitivity
setting channel.
This function is dedicated mixing for switching
the gyro sensitivity and gyro mode (AVCS/
NORMAL) of Futaba airplane use gyros. Up to 3
axes can be set.
ŏThe sensitivity switch can be selected and the
sensitivity of each direction of the switch can be
set. (Switches A to H) If the airplane stalls during
Method
Calling the setting screen
② Select "GYRO SENS"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Activating the function
Gain Channel selection
Switch direction
*<526(16
● When not using this function,
select INH.
Sensitivity switch selection
（C u r r e n t s w i t c h o p e r a t i n g
direction）
Gyrotype,
Gain rate
● Switches to the sensitivity setting
screen of each switch
direction when the
Jog key is pressed.
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
GYRO SENS
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item
and then select the
"ON" by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
（Gyro type）
（Gyro Gain）
● When using a Futaba GYA gyro, select gyro type GY. This switches the gyro sensitivity setting
item to mode and sensitivity direct reading display.
＋
■ Sensitivity switch selection
② Select the "SW" item and then select the
switch by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
or
＋
Range：CH5、CH5/CH7、
CH5/CH8、CH5/CH7/CH8
Default：CH5
Range：SwA 〜 SwH、Default：SwA
■ Gyro type and sensitivity setting
④ Press the Jog key and select the sensitivity setting
screen you want to set and then set "type" (gyro type)
and "rate" (gyro sensitivity) of each channel by pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
Glider
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ Sensitivity setting channel selection
③ Select the ＋
−
"CH" item and
or
then select
the sensitivity
setting channel by pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
−
or
（"type"）Range：STD,GY Default：STD
（"rate"）Range：0 〜 100%（STD）, NOR100 〜 0 〜
AVC100%（GY） Default：50%（STD）, 0%
（GY）
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
153
D/R,EXPO
Dual rate ／ EXPO
WING TYPE
Function
(GLIDER)
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
D/R
The aileron, elevator and rudder channel control surface angle can be switched in 2 steps
ŏThe control surface angle is adjusted by each direction of the switch. The left and right (up and down)
direction of each switch can be set individually.
EXP
This function makes operation more pleasant by changing the operating curve so that servo movement
is sluggish or sensitive relative to stick operation near the aileron, elevator, throttle, and rudder neutral
position. Adjustments can be made in 2 steps according to the control surface angle.
ŏThe "-" side makes servo movement sluggish and the "" side makes servo movement sensitive near the
neutral position. Exponential is applied to entire throttle servo travel. :hen the "" side is increased, the
slow side becomes sluggish and the high side becomes sensitive.
ŏSetting corresponding to each rate of dual rate (DR) is possible. (Except throttle) The direction of each
switch and the left and right (up and down) direction of each channel can be set individually.
Switch selection（SW）
Switches A to H can be selected as the aileron channel, elevator channel, and rudder channel dual rate
(exponential) switch.
ŏDefault：Aileron：SwitchD ／ Elevator：SwitchA ／ Rudder：SwitchB
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "D/R, EXPO"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Glider
● The channel under selection is
underlined.
Channel selection
Dual rate
（Switch Direction）
EXPO
● The dual rate and exponential
settings are displayed by a
curve.
Switch selection
● Channel selection/Select
the setting item with the
Jog key.
154
（Switch number）
（D/R and EXPO rate display）
Top row；Left side ／ down
Bottom row；Right side ／ up
＜ Channel ＞
1：Aileron
2：Elevator
3：Throttle
4：Rudder
D/R
① A channel is chosen by Jog
key.
Range：1, 2, 4
② Adjust the rate by moving the cursor
to D/R with the Jog key, switching the
dual rate switch to the direction you
want to set, moving the stick to the left
(down) or right (up) side and pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
Range：
0 〜 140%
Default：100%
● When you want to
return the set value to
the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
Adjust the rate of each direction of the dual rate switch and stick by repeating step
● Moving to another setting item of the same
channel is possible by Jog key.
EXPO
① Select the "EXP" item and
then select the channel with
the Jog key.
② Adjust the rate by moving the cursor
to EXP with the Jog key, switching the
dual rate switch to the direction you
want to set, moving the stick to the left
(down) or right (up) side and pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
Range：1 〜 4
Range：
-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
● When you want to
return the set value to
the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
Adjust the rate of each direction of the dual rate switch and stick by repeating step
● Moving to another setting item of the
same channel is possible by Jog key.
Switch Change
① Select the "SW" item and then select
the channel with the Jog key.
② A switch is chosen by + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
Glider
Range：1, 2, 4
155
Motor switch
MOTOR SW
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
This function sets the operating motor when
the EP glider with motor is started by switch. The
operating speed can individually set in 2 ranges
of high from slow and slow from high. If you do
motor control with a throttle stick, you should
set this function to INH.
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
ŏFor safety, the ONOFF switch of the aircraft itself
can be set.
ŏIf a transmitter power supply is switched on while
the motor S: has been ON, the warning will
operate. Be sure to switch on a power supply with
the motor-start switch OFF.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "MOTOR SW"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● Present motor control position
027256:
02'(㌣2)) 6$)(6:㌣6:$㌣'2:1
67576:㌣6:'㌣'2:1
2)) 21 326,㌣㌣
63(('㌣2))㌣2))
● Select the setting
item with the
Jog key.
Motor
● Decelerating speed setting
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MODE" item
and then select the
"OFF" by pressing the
+ key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Glider
−
● Start SW
● A setup of the motor control
position (3CH end point)of Highside and Low-side
● Accelerating speed setting
■ Switch selection
② Change the switch by
pressing the + key or
‒ key a t t h e s w i t c h
selection item.
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ Switch direction
③ Select the ＋
" D O W N " it em
or
and then select
the position by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
● If this safety switch is not ON, the
motor will not start even if the
starter switch is turned on. In
"NULL", a safe function does not
work.
＋
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
■ Speed setting
④ Select "SPEED " next to (OFF) and (ON) by Jog key.
Range：OFF,1 〜 10(more slowly)
● (ON) is the acceleration speed setting.
● (OFF) is the deceleration speed setting.
● 2P SW：UP, DOWN
● 3P SW： UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR,
C&DN, DOWN
DANGER
Always remove the propeller from the motor during setting and at operation checks.
Ŷ7KHUHLVWKHGDQJHURIWKHSURSHOOHUVSLQQLQJXQH[SHFWHGO\DQGFDXVLQJDVHULRXVLQMXU\
156
−
or
CONDITION
Condition
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
The condition function lets you change multiple
settings by one switch operation. Different
settings can be made immediately by switching 2
conditions.
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
ŏThe functions that can be changed by condition
are:
・AileronńRudder ・RudderńAileron
・Camber FLP ・Camber MI; ・ButterÁy
・CamberńELE ・ELEńCamber ・AILńCamber
・AILńBRKFL ・Trim mix
Method
Calling the setting screen
② Select "CONDITION"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
&21',7,21
Condition1
● When not using this
Function select INH.
The display of On/Off is
shown when active and
assigned to a switch.
㌣,1+㌣6:$㌣'2:1
㌣,1+㌣6:$㌣'2:1
● Priority is given to the
condition 2 when the
condition 1 and 2 is turned on
simultaneously.
Condition2
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
（Activating the function）
（Switch direction）
（Switch selection）
CONDITION
＋
−
or
Glider
■ Activating the function
① Select the "INH" item of the
condition you want to use and
then set that condition to "ON" or
"OFF" by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
● Set conditions you do not want to use to "INH".
（Changing the switch）
■ Switch selection
② Change the switch by
pressing the + key or
‒ key at the switch
selection item.
＋
−
or
■ Switch direction
③ Select the ON direction
by pressing the + key or
‒ key at the ON direction
selection item.
＋
−
or
Range：
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
Default：SwA
● 2P SW：NULL, UP, DOWN
● 3P SW：NULL, UP, UP&D, UP&C, CNTR, C&DN,
DOWN
157
RUD → AIL
Rudder → Aileron
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
This function is used when you want to mix
the ailerons with rudder input. It is used when
rudder is applied during roll maneuvers such
as, knife edge flight. It can be used to turn or
bank scale models, large models, etc. like a fullsize aircraft.
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
ŏ:hen the mixing direction is reversed by the
linkage, adjustments can be made by changing
the rate polarity.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "RUD → AIL"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
58'‫ڀ‬$,/
Activating the function
Mixing rate
● When not using this function,
select INH.
0,;㌣,1+
5$7(㌣ 1250
6:㌣6:$
326,㌣'2:1
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
3 Position Switch
NULL
ON
UP
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
2 Position Switch
NULL
UP
CENTER
OFF
ON
OFF
CNT&DN
OFF
ON
ON
DOWN
OFF
OFF
ON
● The ON/OFF switch can be changed.
(Selected by Jog key and changed by
+ key.)
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the
selected switch.
DOWN
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Glider
RUD → AIL
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select
the "ON" by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
158
UP&CNT
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
UP&DWN
ON
ON
● When condition was used, the display
can be switched and each connection
can be set by switching the condition
switch.
−
■ Mixing rate
② S e l e c t t h e " R AT E " i t em a n d
then adjust the mixing rate by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
or
Range：-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
● When you do not use a function, set
to the "INH" side.
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.However,
polarity does not return.
CAMBR FLP
Camber flap
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
7KHXSGRZQWUDYHORIHDFKÀDS FDPEHUÀDSV
)/3 EUDNH IODSV )/3 FDQ EH DGMXVWHG
independently for each servo according to the
ZLQJW\SH7KHFDPEHUÀDSVRSHUDWHVE\'7DQG
WKHEUDNHÀDSVRSHUDWHVE\'7
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
Aileron1
(CH1)
Flap1
Flap3
(Camber Flap) (Brake Flap)
(CH5)
(CH8)
Flap4
(Brake Flap)
Aileron2
(CH9)
Flap2
(CH7)
(Camber Flap)
(CH6)
ŏThe axis of each Áap can be shifted
ŏThe control switch can be changed by AU;
channel
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "CAMBR FLP"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
D T5 a n d D T6 s e t
the amount of
movement when
the flap is operated.
● Flap1
● Flap2
● Flap3
● Flap4
&$0%5岜)/3
&$0%(5)/$3
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
57 57 2)6
)㌣㌣㌣
)㌣㌣㌣
)㌣㌣㌣
)㌣㌣㌣
● Up side rate ● Down side rate
● Offset rate
−
● The number is changed
by + key or ‒ key.
（Currently selected condition）
&$0%5岜)/3
‫ق‬1250 %5$.()/$3‫ڀ‬岜岜&$0%(5
57 57 2)6
)/㌣㌣㌣
● Selection of whether or
not mixing from brake
FLP to camber FLP is
performed
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
● Brake FLP to camber FLP
mixing switch selection
Glider
Camber FLP ２page
[Brakeflap → Camberflap]
＋
● Brake FLP to camber FLP
mixing rate and offset
(axis shift)
● Brake FLP to camber FLP mixing
switch operation direction
159
CAMBR MIX
Camber mixing
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
This function adjusts the rate of camber
operation for the wing camber (ailerons, camber
flaps, brake flaps) in the negative and positive
directions. The aileron, flap, and elevator rates
can also be adjusted independently and attitude
changes caused by camber operation can be
All the wing control surfaces are
lowered and the camber is increased
(lift increases)
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
corrected.
,QLWLDOVHWWLQJDVVLJQVFDPEHURSHUDWLRQWRVLGHOHYHU'7
ŏ Operation can be turned on and off by switch
ŏ 9R can be changed by AU; channel 10
All the wing control surfaces are
raised and the camber is
decreased (lift decreases)
Turn the VR
Attitude changes are compensated for by setting the
amount of elevator movement.
Attitude changes are compensated for by setting the
amount of elevator movement.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "CAMBR MIX"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Sets the amount of
movement when
the VR was turned.
（Currently selected condition）
&$0%5岜0,; 1250 5$7( 5$7( $,/㌣㌣
$,/㌣㌣
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
Glider
● Aileron1
● Aileron2
● Camber MIX ACT/INH
● Can be set to operate
from a switch. When
NULL, it is operated by
a VR.
( R AT E1)：T h e a m o u n t o f
operations when VR is turned to
the right.
＋
−
● The number is changed
by + key or ‒ key.
( R AT E2)：T h e a m o u n t o f
operations when VR is turned to
the left.
Sets the amount of [Camber FLP ２page]
（Currently selected condition）
movement when
&$0%5岜0,; 1250 the VR is turned.
● Flap1
● Flap2
● Flap3
● Flap4
● Elevator
160
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
5$7( 5$7( )/3㌣㌣
)/3㌣㌣
)/3㌣㌣
)/3㌣㌣
(/(㌣㌣
● Amount of compensation
of the elevator when the
camber changed.
BUTTERFLY
Butterfly mixing
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
1. Slow the aircraft·s velocity.
2. Provide washout at the wing tips to reduce the
tendency to tip stall.
3. Create more lift toward the center of the wing
allowing it to Áy at a slower speed
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ONOFF by
setting a switch.
ŏ The point at which the butterfly operation
reference point can be offset.
ŏ The differential rate can be adjusted.
This function is utilized to quickly slow the
aircraft and reduce altitude by simultaneously
raising the left and right ailerons and lowering the
ÀDSV FDPEHUÀDSEUDNHÀDS Butterfly (Crow) produces an extremely
HI¿FLHQWODQGLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQE\DFFRPSOLVKLQJ
WKHIROORZLQJ
OFF
ON
Switch set to ON
Resistance increased by raising
the elevators and lowering the
flaps
THR stick lowered (High)
Fine tuning of an elevator
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "BUTTERFLY"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
（Currently selected condition）
Amount of movement setting
● Aileron1
● Aileron2
● Amount of elevator
compensation
● Butterfly : ACT/INH
● Can be either set to a
switch or when NULL is
controlled by the THR
stick.
%877(5)/<岜岜岜
$,/㌣
$,/㌣
(/(㌣
1250 )/3㌣
)/3㌣
)/3㌣
)/3㌣
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
2)67㌣ ● Offset setting ‒Select "OFST" XX%.
＋
−
● The number is changed
by + key or ‒ key.
● When MIX is set to ACT, the
amount of MIX(s) according to
stick operation is displayed.
Brake amount
MAX
Glider
● Current THR stick position
0％ : Low 100％ : High
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
OFST ▶ 100%
At THR stick high
press the Jog key for 1 second
High
Slow
THR stick operation
Brake amount
MAX
OFST ▶60%
At THR stick 60%
press the Jog key for 1 second
● When offset is set below a center, the
mixing of THR stick operates by the high
side.
Start from
60%
High
Slow
THR stick operation
161
CAMBR → ELE
Camber → Elevator mixing
WING TYPE
Function
(GLIDER)
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
When the camber/speed flaps are utilized,
the aircraft might experience, a change in pitch.
This mix compensates for such changes by
incorporating elevator input.
Flap operation
pitch change
ŏ The elevator servos updown rates can be
adjusted separately. If the mixing direction is
reversed, change the mixing rate polarity ( or ²).
ŏ Mixing during flight can be turned ONOFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at S: >NULL@ setting)
Flap1
(CH5)
Flap2
(CH6)
compensated
for by elevators
Elevator
(CH2)
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "CAMBR → ELE"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
&$0%5‫(ڀ‬/( 1250
5$7( 5$7( (/(㌣㌣
Mixing rate
Activating the function
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
3 Position Switch
NULL
ON
UP
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2 Position Switch
NULL
UP
UP&CNT
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
UP&DWN
CENTER
OFF
ON
OFF
CNT&DN
OFF
ON
ON
DOWN
Glider
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
● When condition is used, the display
can be switched and each connection
can be set by switching the condition
switch.
● The ON/OFF switch can be changed.
( S e l e c t e d w i t h t h e Jog key a n d
changed with the +key)
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the
selected switch.
● ( R AT E1) a n d ( R AT E2) s h o w t h e
direction of camber of operation.
Camber → ELE mixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select
the "ON" by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set
to the "INH" side.
162
DOWN
● When not using this function,
select INH.
■ Mixing rate
② S e l e c t t h e " R AT E " i t em a n d
then adjust the mixing rate by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-120 〜 +120%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
ELE → CAMBR
Elevator → Camber mixing
WING TYPE
Function
This function is used when you want to mix the
FDPEHUÀDSVZLWKHOHYDWRURSHUDWLRQ:KHQXVHG
the flaps are lowered by up elevator, and lift is
increased.
(GLIDER)
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
ŏ In-Áight mixing can be turned ONOFF by assigning
this to a switch. (Always ON at S: >NULL@ setting)
ŏ The mixing rate can be adjusted.
ŏ Setting so that the Áaps are not operated near the
center of the elevators is possible. (RANGE)
Aileron1
(CH1)
Flap1
Flap3
(Camber Flap) (Brake Flap)
(CH5)
(CH8)
Up the elevator
flap is down
Flap4
(Brake Flap)
Aileron2
(CH9)
Flap2
(CH7)
(Camber Flap)
(CH6)
Elevator
(CH2)
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "ELE → CAMBR"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
（Currently selected condition）
Mixing rate
● Aileron1
● Aileron2
● Camber MIX ACT/INH
● Can be either set to a
switch or when NULL is
always active.
(/(‫&ڀ‬$0%5 1250 5$7( 5$7( $,/㌣㌣
$,/㌣㌣
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
5$1*(㌣ ● Described on
the next page.
● Current position of the
elevator stick
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
＋
−
● The number is changed
by + key or ‒ key.
（Currently selected condition）
Mixing rate
(/(‫&ڀ‬$0%5 1250 ● Flap1
● Flap2
● Flap3
● Flap4
5$7( 5$7( )/3㌣㌣
)/3㌣㌣
)/3㌣㌣
)/3㌣㌣
Glider
[ELE → Camber ２page]
● (RATE1) and (RATE2) show
the direction of elevator of
operation.
163
（ELE → Camber ）
(/(‫&ڀ‬$0%5 1250 5$7( 5$7( $,/㌣㌣
$,/㌣㌣
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
5$1*(㌣ ● When MIX is set to ACT, the
amount of MIX(s) according to
stick operation is displayed.
● Setting that inhibits camber mixing near the elevator center position. Setting so
that camber mixing is performed only when the elevators were operated greatly
is possible.
RANGE setting
■ Setting state
① Select the "0%" item next to
RANGE with the Jog key.
■ To setting value
② Move the elevator stick to the position you
want operation to begin.
Can be either up or down. When set
to down, the up side is also set by the
same amount.
■ Set value memorization
③ Press the Jog key for 1 second.
Hold the stick in
position.
(/(‫&ڀ‬$0%5 1250 5$7( 5$7( $,/㌣㌣
$,/㌣㌣
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
5$1*(㌣ When elevator operation exceeds the range,
the stick position is displayed and mixing is
performed.
Glider
164
● When a RANGE number is selected and the
Jog key is pressed for 1 second, RANGE is
reset to 0% and normal mixing is performed.
AIL → CAMBR
Aileron → Camber mixing
WING TYPE
Function
7KLVPL[LQJOLQNVWKHFDPEHUÀDSVZLWKDLOHURQ
operation (stick). It is used when you want to
increase roll axis maneuverability.
(GLIDER)
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
ŏ:hen the mixing direction is reversed by the
linkage, adjustments can be made by changing
the rate polarity.
Flaps and ailerons
operate
OFF
ON
Set switch to ON
Roll is corrected by using
the ailerons to control the
camber FLP.
Ailerons operation
Method
Calling the setting screen
② Select "AIL → CAMBR"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
$,/‫&ڀ‬$0%5 1250
/()7 5,*+7 )/3㌣㌣
)/3㌣㌣
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
Mixing rate
Activating the function
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
3 Position Switch
NULL
ON
ON
ON
UP
UP&DWN
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2 Position Switch
NULL
UP
UP&CNT
ON
CENTER
OFF
ON
CNT&DN
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
DOWN
OFF
OFF
ON
● When not using this function,
select INH.
● When condition was used, the
display can be switched and
each connection can be set by
switching the condition switch.
● The ON/OFF switch can be changed.
( S e l e c t e d w i t h t h e Jog key a n d
changed with the +key)
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the
selected switch.
DOWN
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Glider
ON
AIL → Camber mixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select
the "ON" by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set
to the "INH" side.
■ Mixing rate
② S e l e c t t h e " R AT E " i t em a n d
then adjust the mixing rate by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-120 〜 +120%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
165
AIL → BRKFL
Aileron → Brake flap mixing
WING TYPE
Function
This mixing links the brake flaps with aileron
operation (stick). It is used when you want to
increase roll axis maneuverability.
(GLIDER)
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
ŏ:hen the mixing direction is reversed by the
linkage, adjustments can be made by changing
the rate polarity.
Flaps and ailerons
operate
OFF
ON
Set the switch to ON
Roll is corrected by using
the ailerons to control the
brake FLP.
Ailerons operation
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "AIL → BRKFL"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
$,/‫ڀ‬%5.)/ 1250
Mixing rate
Activating the function
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
/()7 5,*+7 )/3㌣㌣
)/3㌣㌣
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
3 Position Switch
NULL
ON
UP
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2 Position Switch
NULL
UP
UP&CNT
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
UP&DWN
ON
ON
CENTER
OFF
ON
OFF
CNT&DN
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
● When condition was used, the
display can be switched and each
connection can be set by switching
the condition switch.
● The ON/OFF switch can be changed.
( S e l e c t e d w i t h t h e Jog key a n d
changed with the +key)
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the
selected switch.
DOWN
Glider
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
AIL → BRKFL mixing
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item and then select
the "ON" by pressing the + key or ‒
key.
＋
−
or
● When you do not use a function, set
to the "INH" side.
166
DOWN
OFF
● When not using this function,
select INH.
■ Mixing rate
② S e l e c t t h e " R AT E " i t em a n d
then adjust the mixing rate by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
＋
−
or
Range：-120 〜 +120%
Default：0%
● When you want to return the set value to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
Trim mix
TRIM MIX
(GLIDER)
WING TYPE
Function
1AIL 2AIL 2AIL+1F 2AIL+2F 2AIL+4F
ŏThe servo speed at which trim is to the set position
can be set.
This function shifts the ailerons, elevators, and
HDFKÀDSWULPWRWKHSUHVHWSRVLWLRQE\PHDQVRID
switch.
OFF
Aileron1
(CH1)
Flap1
Flap3
(Camber Flap) (Brake Flap)
(CH5)
(CH8)
ON
Set the switch to ON
Trim of each control surface is
moved to the set value.
Flap4
(Brake Flap)
Aileron2
(CH9)
Flap2
(CH7)
(Camber Flap)
(CH6)
Elevator
(CH2)
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "TRIM MIX"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
[TRIM MIX page1]
75,00,; 1250 $,/㌣ )/3㌣
$,/㌣ )/3㌣
(/(㌣)/3㌣
)/3㌣
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
＋
−
[TRIM MIX page2]
● The number is changed
by + key or ‒ key.
75,00,;
Activating the function
'(/$< $,/㌣2))
)/3㌣2))
(/(㌣2))
3 Position Switch
NULL
ON
ON
ON
UP
ON
OFF
OFF
2 Position Switch
NULL
UP
UP&DWN
ON
OFF
ON
DOWN
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
UP&CNT
ON
ON
OFF
CENTER
OFF
ON
OFF
CNT&DN
OFF
ON
ON
DOWN
OFF
OFF
ON
● Sets the trim neutral position of each
control surface.
Range：-100 〜 +100
Returned to 0 by pressing the + key
and ‒ key simultaneously.
● The ON/OFF switch can be changed.
(Selected with the Jog key and
changed with the +key)
● Sets the ON/OFF direction of the
selected switch.
Glider
● When not using this
function, select INH.
0,;㌣,1+
6:㌣6Z$㌣'2:1
● When condition is used, the display
can be switched and each connection
can be set by switching the condition
switch.
● Servo speed at which the trim position is to the set
position. Sudden attitude changes are prevented
by turning the switch on. (Selected by Jog key and
changed by + key and ‒ key.)
Range：OFF(fast shift）、1 〜 10（slow shift）
Returned to OFF by pressing the Jog key for a long
time.
*This is not the servo speed when the stick was
operated.
167
Multicopter Function
The setting screen of each function is called from the following menu. The function when
the model type was set to multicopter (MULTI COPT) is displayed here.
Power ON
To menu screen
by holding down
the + key
（Home screen）
● When t h e E N D k e y i s
pressed, the display returns
to the home screen.
● When the + key is pressed for
1 second, the menu screen is
（1 second）
displayed.
＋
END
MENU
0(18岜岜岜岜
0(18岜岜岜岜
MENU
1/2
㌣0'/6(/
㌣0'/1$0(
㌣)$,/6$)(
㌣5(9(56(
㌣7,0(5
㌣6(592
㌣(1'32,17
㌣75,0
㌣68%75,0
㌣30,;
㌣$8;&+$1
㌣3$5$0(7(5
Multicopter
0(18岜岜岜岜
MENU
2/2
㌣7(/(0(75<
㌣6(1625
㌣6%86/,1.
㌣0'/75$16
㌣75$,1(5
㌣*<526(16
㌣'5(;32
㌣&175$/50
（Selection）
● Move the cursor
(highlighted) up and down
and to the left and right
with the Jog key and select
the function.
The cursor can be moved
over several pages.
（Calling the setting screen）
● Press the Jog key to open the
setting screen.
168
key ／ LCD
●＋ key
●− key
●Jog key
●END key
Refer to "Common Functions"
previously described for a
description of this function.
■ Function
MENU1/3
MDL-SEL
MENU2/3
(P.40)
TELEMETRY
(P.66)
Model select ／ Model Copy ／ Data
reset ／ RX ／ Link
Telemetry Display ／ Alarm setup
MDL-NAME
Telemetry sensor
(P.43)
Model name ／ User name
FAIL SAFE
(P.45)
Fail safe
REVERSE
(P.47)
Servo reverse
TIMER
(P.48)
SENSOR
SBUS LINK
MDL-TRANS
TRAINER
SERVO
D/R, EXPO
END POINT
Dual rate ／ EXPO
CNTR ALRM
(P.51)
Trim reset ／ Trim step
SUB TRIM
(P.52)
Sub trim
P.MIX1-6
Center alarm
(P.170)
(P.171)
(P.173)
Multicopter
Servo monitor ／ Servo test
TRIM
(P.93)
Trainer
Gyro mixing
End point
(P.92)
Data transfer of another T10J
GYRO SENS
(P.50)
(P.89)
S.BUS servo set up
Timer
(P.49)
(P.83)
(P.53)
Program mixing 1 〜 6
AUX-CHAN
(P.56)
AUX channel
PARAMETER
(P.58)
Data reset ／ Model type ／ ATLtrim ／ LCD contrast ／ Back light :
mode, time, adjustment ／ Home
display ／ Battery alarm ／ Battery
vibration ／ Buzzer tone ／ Jog
navi ／ Jog light ／ Jog time ／
Telemetry : mode, unit ／ Speech :
language, volume ／ Stick position
alarm
169
GYRO SENS
Gyro sensor
(MULTICOPT)
ŏThe sensitivity switch can be selected and the
sensitivity of each direction of the switch can be
set. (Switches A to H)
ŏCH5, CH5CH7, CH5CH8 or CH5CH7CH8
combinations can be selected as the sensitivity
setting channel.
Function
This function is dedicated mixing for switching
the gyro sensitivity and gyro mode (AVCS/
NORMAL) of Futaba gyros. Up to 3 axes can be
set. The attitude control of multicopter uses the
system of multicopter attachment.
This "GYROSENS" will be used for accessories,
such as camera control.
*When this function is used, it becomes impossible for
CH5 to use it for multi copter controller.
Use CH6 for multi copter controller and use SwC.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "GYRO SENS"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
*<526(16
Activating the function
Gain Channel selection
Switch direction
● When not using this function,
select INH.
Gain switch selection
（C u r r e n t s w i t c h o p e r a t i n g
direction）
Gyrotype,
Gain rate
● Select the setting item
with the Jog key.
（Gyro type）
（Gyro Gain）
● Switches to the
sensitivity setting
screen of each switch
direction when the
Jog key is pressed.
● When using a Futaba GYA gyro, select gyro type GY. This switches the gyro sensitivity setting
item to mode and sensitivity direct reading display.
Multicopter
GYRO SENS
■ Activating the function
① Select the "MIX" item
and then select the
"ON" by pressing the +
key or ‒ key.
＋
■ Sensitivity switch selection
② Select the "SW" item and then select the
switch by pressing the + key or ‒ key.
−
or
＋
● When you do not use a function, set to the
"INH" side.
■ Sensitivity setting channel selection
③ Select the ＋
−
" C H " i tem an d
or
then select
the sensitivity
setting channel by pressing the + key
or ‒ key.
Range：CH5、CH5/CH7、
CH5/CH8、CH5/CH7/CH8
Default：CH5
170
−
or
Range：SwA 〜 SwH、Default：SwA
■ Gyro type and sensitivity setting
④ Press the Jog key and select the sensitivity setting
screen you want to set and then set “type” (gyro type)
and “rate” (gyro sensitivity) of each channel by pressing
the +key or ‒ key.
（"type"）Range：STD,GY Default：STD
（"rate"）Range：0 〜 100%（STD）, NOR100 〜 0 〜
AVC100%（GY） Default：50%
（STD）, 0%
（GY）
● When you want to return the set value to the initial
value, press the + key and ‒ key simultaneously.
D/R,EXPO
Dual rate ／ EXPO
(MULTICOPT)
Function
D/R
The aileron, elevator and rudder channel control surface angle can be switched in 2 steps
ŏThe control surface angle is adjusted by each direction of the switch. The left and right (up and down)
direction of each switch can be set individually.
EXP
This function makes operation more pleasant by changing the operating curve so that servo movement
is sluggish or sensitive relative to stick operation near the aileron, elevator, throttle, and rudder neutral
position. Adjustments can be made in 2 steps according to the control surface angle.
ŏThe ´-µ side makes servo movement sluggish and the ´µ side makes servo movement sensitive near
the neutral position. Exponential is applied to entire throttle servo travel. :hen the ´µ side is increased,
the slow side becomes sluggish and the high side becomes sensitive.
ŏSetting corresponding to each rate of dual rate (DR) is possible. (Except throttle) The direction of each
switch and the left and right (up and down) direction of each channel can be set individually.
Switch selection（SW）
Switches A to H can be selected as the aileron channel, elevator channel, and rudder channel dual rate
(exponential) switch.
ŏDefault：Aileron：SwitchD ／ Elevator：SwitchA ／ Rudder：SwitchB
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "D/R,EXPO"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
Multicopter
● The channel under selection is
underlined.
Channel selection
Dual rate
（Switch Direction）
EXPO
● The dual rate and exponential
settings are displayed by a
curve.
Switch selection
● Channel selection/Select
the setting item with the
Jog key.
（Switch number）
（D/R and EXPO rate display）
Top row；Left side ／ down
Bottom row；Right side ／ up
＜ Channel ＞
1：Aileron
2：Elevator
3：Throttle
4：Rudder
171
D/R
① A channel is chosen by Jog
key.
Range：1, 2, 4
② Adjust the rate by moving the cursor
to D/R with the Jog key, switching the
dual rate switch to the direction you
want to set, moving the stick to the left
(down) or right (up) side and pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
Range：
0 〜 140%
Default：100%
● When you want to
return the set value
to the initial value,
press the + key and ‒
key simultaneously.
Adjust the rate of each direction of the dual rate switch and stick by repeating step
● Moving to another setting item of the same
channel is possible by Jog key.
EXPO
① Select the "EXP" item and
then select the channel with
the Jog key.
② Adjust the rate by moving the cursor
to EXP with the Jog key, switching the
dual rate switch to the direction you
want to set, moving the stick to the left
(down) or right (up) side and pressing
the + key or ‒ key.
−
＋
Range：1 〜 4
Range：
-100 〜 +100%
Default：0%
● When you want to
return the set value to
the initial value, press
the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
Adjust the rate of each direction of the dual rate switch and stick by repeating step
● Moving to another setting item of the
same channel is possible by Jog key.
Multicopter
Switch Change
① Select the "SW" item and then select
the channel with the Jog key.
＋
−
or
Range：1, 2, 4
172
② A switch is chosen by + key or -key.
Range：SwA 〜 SwH
CNTR ALRM
Center alarm
(MULTICOPT)
Function
$QDODUP VLQJOHEHHS FDQEHVRXQGHGDWWKHVSHFL¿HGWKURWWOHVWLFNSRVLWLRQ
ŏAlarm function ONOFF can be set by switch.
Beep sounds
When the THR stick
is set to the
specified position.
Method
Calling the setting screen
① Call the menu screen from the
home screen by pressing the +
key for 1 second.
② Select "CNTR ALRM"
from the menu with the
Jog key.
③ Open the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
＋ （1 second）
● Select the item with the
Jog key.
Position setting
① Stick position is chosen by
Jog key.
67.326,$/50
02'(㌣21
6:㌣6Z$
326,㌣'2:1
67,&.㌣ /R$/0㌣2))
● ON ; If the throttle stick is not in the low position, you'll
have an alarm until the stick is in the low position.
OFF ; Low position alarm does not occur.
② Set the throttle stick to the
position at which you want
to generate the alarm.
● When INH is selected, the
function cannot be used.
When ON or OFF is selected,
the function is activated. ON
and OFF changes are linked
to the switch.
● The number in parenthesis
is the current throttle stick
position.
Multicopter
INH ⇔ ON/OFF
Switch selsction
Switch direction
Stick position
Low position alarm
&175$/50
③ When the Jog key is held
down the alarm sounds at
that position.
&175$/50
67.326,$/50
02'(㌣21
6:㌣6Z$
326,㌣'2:1
67,&.㌣ /R$/0㌣2))
THR Stick
Memorize the position at
which the beep is to sound.
173
TX SETTING
The settings here are special settings that are unnecessary during normal use. The stick mode can be
changed and stick adjustment (calibration), throttle lever reverse, and language can be set.
Turn on the power switch with the + key
and ‒ key pressed in the power off state. The
screen shown at the left appears. To return
to the home screen, turn off the power
and then turn the power back on without
pressing the keys.
7;6(77,1*
67.02'(
67.$'7+55(9
1(;7
125
/$1*8$*(
(QJOLVKᴾ
■ STK-MODE
AIL
RUD
ELE THR
the stick ratchet must be changed. Request
THR ELE
MODE 1
RUD
AIL
AIL
RUD
MODE 2
that this be done by Futaba Service. (Charged
modification)
RUD
AIL
ELE THR
This is the MODE1 〜 MODE4 setting. The
initial state is MODE2. To change the mode
THR ELE
MODE 4
MODE 3
■ STK-ADJ
This function is normally not used. If stick deviation should occur, make this adjustment.
Do not use it in the normal state.
Calling the setting screen
① Turn off the power and then
turn the power back on while
pressing the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
＋
② Select STK-ADJ → NEXT
in the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Enter the setting screen by
pressing the Jog key.
② Press the Jog key down
and select NEUT ■ .
③ Set the stick to the neutral
position and press the Jog
key.
−
Stick adjustment
① Select the stick you want to
adjust with 1 〜 4 with the +
key.
＋
1
4
3
174
2
④ Swing the selected stick fully
to the left and right (up and
down).
⑤ ■ Appears next to "LEFT"
and "RGHT". Press the Jog
key.
⑥ When "Complete" is
displayed, adjustment is
complete.
END
■ THR-REV
This function is not used. When you want to use full throttle with the throttle stick down
and slow with the throttle stick up, select REV. When the stick is up, trim is effective and
when the stick is down, trim is not effective.
*Throttle servo operation reversed by the linkage is usually performed by reverse in the
normal menu. When throttle servo operation is reversed with the THR-REV function, trim
becomes ineffective at slow.
THR-REV
① Turn off the power and then
turn on the power while
pressing the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
＋
② Select THR-REV → NOR
in the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Select NOR or REV by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
Setting is ended by power
off.
＋
−
−
■ LANGUAGE
The language displayed at proportional can be changed. The initial setting is English, but
can be selected from among 7 languages.
LANGUAGE
① Turn off the power and then
turn on the power while
pressing the + key and ‒ key
simultaneously.
＋
② Select
LANGUAGE → English in
the menu with the Jog
key.
③ Select NOR or REV by
pressing the + key or ‒ key.
Setting is ended by power
off.
＋
−
−
Return from the transmitter setting screen to the normal menu by turning on the power
without pressing a key.
FUTABA CORPORATION
oak kandakajicho 8F 3-4 Kandakajicho, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0045, Japan
TEL: +81-3-4316-4820, FAX: +81-3-4316-4823
©FUTABA CORPORATION
2018, 5 (5)
175
">